InteliCompact NT 2.1 Reference Guide


Paralleling gen-set controller
SW version 2.1, July 2015
Reference Guide
Copyright ©2015 ComAp a.s.
ComAp a.s.
Kundratka 17, 180 00 Praha 8, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111, Fax: +420 266 316 647
E-mail:info@comap.cz, www.comap.cz
Table of contents
1 Document information ................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Clarification of notation ............................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Conformity Declaration ............................................................................................................... 8
2 System overview ............................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 General description .................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Configurability and monitoring .................................................................................................... 9
2.2.1 LiteEdit ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.2 InteliMonitor ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.3 WinScope......................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.4 WebSupervisor ................................................................................................................ 11
2.3 Applications overview ............................................................................................................... 12
2.3.1 Single applications ........................................................................................................... 12
2.3.2 Multiple applications ........................................................................................................ 12
2.4 True RMS measurement .......................................................................................................... 13
3 Installation .................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Mounting ................................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Package contents ..................................................................................................................... 14
3.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 15
3.4 Terminal diagram ...................................................................................................................... 16
3.5 General ..................................................................................................................................... 16
3.6 Wiring........................................................................................................................................ 17
3.7 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. 17
3.8 Power supply ............................................................................................................................ 17
3.8.1 Power supply fusing ......................................................................................................... 19
3.9 Voltage and current inputs ....................................................................................................... 19
3.10 Speed measurement ................................................................................................................ 21
3.10.1 Pickup .............................................................................................................................. 21
3.10.2 Generator frequency ........................................................................................................ 22
3.10.3 Additional running engine indication ................................................................................ 22
3.11 Binary inputs ............................................................................................................................. 23
3.12 Binary outputs ........................................................................................................................... 23
3.13 Analog inputs ............................................................................................................................ 24
3.13.1 Tristate inputs .................................................................................................................. 25
3.14 Circuit breakers ........................................................................................................................ 26
3.14.1 Breaker control outputs .................................................................................................... 26
3.14.2 MCB special requirements ............................................................................................... 27
3.15 AVR interface ........................................................................................................................... 27
3.15.1 IG-AVRi ............................................................................................................................ 27
3.15.2 AVR list ............................................................................................................................ 30
3.16 Speed governor interface ......................................................................................................... 42
3.16.1 Speed governor list .......................................................................................................... 43
3.17 CAN bus wiring ......................................................................................................................... 50
3.18 Recommended CAN/RS485 connection .................................................................................. 51
3.18.1 CAN bus connection ........................................................................................................ 51
3.18.2 RS485 connection ........................................................................................................... 51
3.19 Extension modules ................................................................................................................... 53
3.19.1 IGS-PTM .......................................................................................................................... 53
3.19.2 IGL-RA15 remote annunciator ......................................................................................... 54
3.19.3 IL-NT-AOUT8 ................................................................................................................... 55
3.19.4 IL-NT BIO8 ....................................................................................................................... 55
3.19.5 IC-NT CT-BIO7 ................................................................................................................ 57
3.20 Communication modules .......................................................................................................... 59
3.20.1 IL-NT RS232 .................................................................................................................... 59
3.20.2 IL-NT RS232-485 ............................................................................................................. 60
3.20.3 IL-NT S-USB .................................................................................................................... 60
NT
InteliCompact , SW version 2.1
InteliCompact-NT-2.1-Reference Guide.pdf, ©ComAp – May 2015 2
3.20.4 IB-Lite ............................................................................................................................... 61
3.20.5 IL-NT GPRS ..................................................................................................................... 62
3.20.6 InternetBridge-NT ............................................................................................................ 64
3.21 EFI engines .............................................................................................................................. 65
3.21.1 Differences between a classic and EFI-engine application ............................................. 65
3.22 Typical wiring – EFI engine ...................................................................................................... 68
3.23 Typical wiring – classic engine ................................................................................................. 69
3.24 Emergency Stop ....................................................................................................................... 71
4 Putting it into operation ............................................................................................................... 72
4.1 Programming the configuration ................................................................................................ 72
4.2 Programming the firmware ....................................................................................................... 72
4.3 Programming a non-responsive controller ............................................................................... 73
4.5 Factory default configuration .................................................................................................... 74
4.5.1 SPtM ................................................................................................................................ 74
4.5.2 MINT ................................................................................................................................ 75
4.6 Step-by-step guide ................................................................................................................... 76
5 Operator guide.............................................................................................................................. 78
5.1 Front panel elements ................................................................................................................ 78
5.2 User interface modes ............................................................................................................... 80
5.3 Display screens and pages structure ....................................................................................... 80
5.4 View measured values ............................................................................................................. 82
5.5 Setpoints – view and change ................................................................................................... 82
5.6 Browsing the history log ........................................................................................................... 83
5.7 Browsing alarms ....................................................................................................................... 84
5.8 Entering the password .............................................................................................................. 85
5.9 Controller information screen ................................................................................................... 85
5.10 Controller language selection ................................................................................................... 87
5.11 User interface mode selection .................................................................................................. 87
5.12 Display contrast adjustment ..................................................................................................... 87
6 Function description .................................................................................................................... 88
6.1 Island operation flowchart ........................................................................................................ 88
6.2 Parallel operation flowchart ...................................................................................................... 89
6.3 Operating modes ...................................................................................................................... 90
6.3.1 OFF .................................................................................................................................. 90
6.3.2 MAN ................................................................................................................................. 90
6.3.3 AUT .................................................................................................................................. 91
6.3.4 TEST ................................................................................................................................ 91
6.4 Engine start .............................................................................................................................. 92
6.4.1 Diesel engine ................................................................................................................... 92
6.4.2 Gas engine....................................................................................................................... 94
6.5 Stabilization .............................................................................................................................. 96
6.6 Connecting to the load.............................................................................................................. 96
6.6.1 Connecting to dead bus ................................................................................................... 97
6.6.2 Synchronizing .................................................................................................................. 97
6.7 Parallel to mains operation – SPtM .......................................................................................... 98
6.7.1 Ramping the power up ..................................................................................................... 98
6.7.2 Load control ..................................................................................................................... 98
6.7.3 Power factor control ......................................................................................................... 98
6.7.4 Object load dependent auto start .................................................................................... 99
6.7.5 Ramping the power down ................................................................................................ 99
6.7.6 Peak load shaving ........................................................................................................... 99
6.7.7 Export Limit ...................................................................................................................... 99
6.8 Parallel to mains operation – MINT ........................................................................................ 102
6.8.1 Ramping the power up ................................................................................................... 102
6.8.2 Load control modes ....................................................................................................... 102
6.8.3 Power factor control ....................................................................................................... 102
6.8.4 Ramping the power down .............................................................................................. 102
6.9 Island operation – SPtM ......................................................................................................... 102
6.9.1 Island to PtM transfers ................................................................................................... 103
NT
6.10 Island operation – MINT ......................................................................................................... 103
6.11 Power management ............................................................................................................... 104
6.11.1 The concept ................................................................................................................... 104
6.11.2 Basics ............................................................................................................................ 104
6.11.3 Reserves, minimal running power ................................................................................. 105
6.11.4 Priorities ......................................................................................................................... 105
6.11.5 Load Demand Start/Stop ............................................................................................... 106
6.11.6 Reaction to alarms ......................................................................................................... 108
6.11.7 Related binary inputs ..................................................................................................... 108
6.11.8 Related binary outputs ................................................................................................... 109
6.11.9 Load Demand Swap ...................................................................................................... 109
6.11.10 Related binary inputs ..................................................................................................... 110
6.11.11 Related binary outputs ................................................................................................... 110
6.11.12 “How to” examples: ........................................................................................................ 110
6.11.13 Related setpoints and values......................................................................................... 111
6.12 AMF function .......................................................................................................................... 111
6.12.1 Mains failure detection ................................................................................................... 111
6.12.2 Healthy mains detection ................................................................................................ 112
6.12.3 The AMF procedure ....................................................................................................... 112
6.13 Engine cool down and stop .................................................................................................... 112
6.13.1 Stopped gen-set evaluation ........................................................................................... 113
6.14 Alarm management ................................................................................................................ 113
6.14.1 Alarm handling ............................................................................................................... 114
6.14.2 Alarm states ................................................................................................................... 114
6.14.3 Alarm types – Yellow level ............................................................................................. 115
6.14.4 Alarm types – Red level ................................................................................................. 115
6.14.5 Sensor fail detection (FLS) ............................................................................................ 115
6.14.6 Remote alarm messaging .............................................................................................. 116
6.14.7 Alarmlist ......................................................................................................................... 117
6.14.8 ECU Alarmlist................................................................................................................. 117
6.14.9 Built-in alarms ................................................................................................................ 118
6.15 History log ............................................................................................................................... 118
6.16 Exercise timers ....................................................................................................................... 121
6.16.1 MINT .............................................................................................................................. 122
6.16.2 SPtM .............................................................................................................................. 122
6.17 Analog switches ...................................................................................................................... 122
6.18 Power switch .......................................................................................................................... 123
6.19 Regulation loops ..................................................................................................................... 123
6.19.1 SPtM .............................................................................................................................. 123
6.19.2 MINT .............................................................................................................................. 124
6.19.3 Regulation control loops overview ................................................................................. 125
6.19.4 PI regulation adjustment ................................................................................................ 125
7 Setpoints ..................................................................................................................................... 127
7.1 Password protection ............................................................................................................... 127
7.2 Setpoint synchronization ........................................................................................................ 127
7.3 Setpoint groups ...................................................................................................................... 127
7.3.1 Setpoints – Process Control .......................................................................................... 128
7.3.2 Setpoints – Basic Settings ............................................................................................. 128
7.3.3 Setpoints – Comms Settings ......................................................................................... 128
7.3.4 Setpoints – Engine Params ........................................................................................... 129
7.3.5 Setpoints – Engine Protect ............................................................................................ 129
7.3.6 Setpoints – Gener Protect ............................................................................................. 129
7.3.7 Setpoints – Pwr Management ........................................................................................ 130
7.3.8 Setpoints – AMF Settings .............................................................................................. 130
7.3.9 Setpoints – Sync/Load Ctrl ............................................................................................ 131
7.3.10 Setpoints – Volt/PF Control ........................................................................................... 131
7.3.11 Setpoints – ExtI/O Protect ............................................................................................. 131
7.3.12 Setpoints – SMS/E-Mail ................................................................................................. 131
7.3.13 Setpoints – AnalogSwitches .......................................................................................... 132
7.3.14 Setpoints – Date/Time ................................................................................................... 132
NT
7.3.15 Setpoints – Sensors Spec ............................................................................................. 132
8 Values .......................................................................................................................................... 133
8.1 Invalid flag .............................................................................................................................. 133
8.2 Value groups .......................................................................................................................... 133
8.2.1 Values – Engine ............................................................................................................. 133
8.2.2 Values – Generator ........................................................................................................ 134
8.2.3 Values – Mains .............................................................................................................. 134
8.2.4 Values – Bus .................................................................................................................. 135
8.2.5 Values – Pwr Management ............................................................................................ 135
8.2.6 Values – Controller I/O .................................................................................................. 135
8.2.7 Values – Extension I/O .................................................................................................. 135
8.2.8 Values – Statistics ......................................................................................................... 136
8.2.9 Values – Date/Time ....................................................................................................... 136
8.2.10 Values – Info .................................................................................................................. 136
9 Binary input functions ............................................................................................................... 137
9.1 Common functions .................................................................................................................. 137
9.2 MINT specific .......................................................................................................................... 137
9.3 SPtM specific .......................................................................................................................... 137
10 Binary output functions ....................................................................................................... 138
10.1 Common functions .................................................................................................................. 138
10.2 ECU info ................................................................................................................................. 138
10.3 Alarm mirrors .......................................................................................................................... 139
10.4 MINT specific .......................................................................................................................... 140
10.5 SPtM specific .......................................................................................................................... 140
11 Communication .................................................................................................................... 141
11.1 Direct cable connection .......................................................................................................... 141
11.2 Modem connection ................................................................................................................. 142
11.2.1 Recommended GSM modems ...................................................................................... 142
11.2.2 Modem setup procedure ................................................................................................ 143
11.3 Internet connection ................................................................................................................. 143
11.3.1 SPtM .............................................................................................................................. 143
11.3.2 MINT .............................................................................................................................. 144
11.3.3 Using a web browser ..................................................................................................... 145
11.3.4 IB-Lite setup procedure ................................................................................................. 145
11.3.5 System integration ......................................................................................................... 146
11.3.6 InternetBridge-NT setup procedure ............................................................................... 146
11.3.7 IG-IB setup procedure ................................................................................................... 146
11.3.8 SNMP ............................................................................................................................. 146
11.3.9 AirGate ........................................................................................................................... 146
11.3.10 Locate ............................................................................................................................ 146
11.4 Modbus protocol ..................................................................................................................... 147
11.5 IC-NT-RD Remote display software ....................................................................................... 148
12 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 149
12.1 Backup battery replacement ................................................................................................... 149
13 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 151
14 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 154
14.1 Power supply .......................................................................................................................... 154
14.2 Operating conditions............................................................................................................... 154
14.3 Physical dimensions ............................................................................................................... 154
14.4 Standard conformity ............................................................................................................... 154
14.5 Binary inputs ........................................................................................................................... 155
14.6 Binary outputs ......................................................................................................................... 155
14.7 Analog inputs .......................................................................................................................... 155
14.8 Generator/Mains measurements ............................................................................................ 155
14.9 Pickup input ............................................................................................................................ 156
14.10 Charging alternator pre-excitation circuit ................................................................................ 156
14.11 AVR output ............................................................................................................................. 156
NT
14.11.1 IG-AVRi module ............................................................................................................. 156
14.11.2 IG-AVRi Trans/LV .......................................................................................................... 156
14.11.3 IG-AVRi Trans/100 ........................................................................................................ 157
14.12 Governor output ...................................................................................................................... 157
14.13 Remote communication interface ........................................................................................... 157
14.14 Extension modules interface .................................................................................................. 157
14.15 Interface to other controllers ................................................................................................... 157
14.15.1 Recommended CAN cables .......................................................................................... 158
15 Language support ................................................................................................................ 159
16 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 160
16.1 Table of setpoints ................................................................................................................... 160
16.1.1 Group: Process Control ................................................................................................. 160
16.1.2 Group: Basic Settings .................................................................................................... 164
16.1.3 Group: Comms Settings ................................................................................................ 168
16.1.4 Group: Engine Params .................................................................................................. 174
16.1.5 Group: Engine Protect ................................................................................................... 179
16.1.6 Group: Gener Protect .................................................................................................... 183
16.1.7 Group: Pwr Management ............................................................................................... 188
16.1.8 Group: AMF Settings ..................................................................................................... 195
16.1.9 Group: Sync/Load Ctrl ................................................................................................... 199
16.1.10 Group: Volt/PF Ctrl ........................................................................................................ 204
16.1.11 Group: ExtI/O Protect .................................................................................................... 205
16.1.12 Group: SMS/E-Mail ........................................................................................................ 208
16.1.13 Group: AnalogSwitches ................................................................................................. 209
16.1.14 Group: Date/Time .......................................................................................................... 211
16.1.15 Group: Sensors Spec .................................................................................................... 215
16.2 Table of values ....................................................................................................................... 218
16.2.1 Group: Engine ................................................................................................................ 218
16.2.2 Group: Generator ........................................................................................................... 221
16.2.3 Group: Mains ................................................................................................................. 227
16.2.4 Group: Bus ..................................................................................................................... 231
16.2.5 Group: Pwr Management ............................................................................................... 233
16.2.6 Group: Controller I/O ..................................................................................................... 235
16.2.7 Group: Extension I/O ..................................................................................................... 239
16.2.8 Group: Statistics............................................................................................................. 241
16.2.9 Group: Date/Time .......................................................................................................... 243
16.2.10 Group: Info ..................................................................................................................... 244
16.3 Table of binary input functions ............................................................................................... 246
16.3.1 Common functions ......................................................................................................... 246
16.3.2 MINT specific ................................................................................................................. 250
16.3.3 SPtM specific ................................................................................................................. 251
16.4 Table of binary output functions ............................................................................................. 252
16.4.1 Common functions ......................................................................................................... 252
16.4.2 ECU info......................................................................................................................... 260
16.4.3 Alarm mirrors ................................................................................................................. 262
16.4.4 MINT specific ................................................................................................................. 272
16.4.5 SPtM specific ................................................................................................................. 273
16.5 Table of internal alarms .......................................................................................................... 274
NT
1 Document information
InteliCompact-NT® – Reference guide
Written by: Jan Tomandl, Revised by: Jan Donat, Jan Podlipny
©2013 ComAp a.s.
Kundratka 17, Praha 8, Czech Republic
Phone: +420246012111, fax: +420266316647
Web: HTTP://WWW.COMAP.CZ, e-mail: info@comap.cz
DOCUMENT HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER RELATED SW. VERSION DATE
1 1.0 30.05.2008
2 1.1 25.03.2009
3 1.2 22.10.2009
4 1.2.2 11.05.2010
5 1.3.1 28.11.2011
6 1.4 06.03.2013
7 2.0 30.4.2014
8 2.1 16.07.2015
This documentation is also available in electronic form as a Windows help file

InteliCompact-NT.chm. The help can be opened from Windows Explorer or directly from
NT
the LiteEdit menu bar (if a connection is established to an InteliCompact controller).
Pressing F1 in the LiteEdit setpoint, values or configuration window will open the help
with the context of currently selected setpoint, value and binary input or output function.
NT
1.1 Clarification of notation
HINT
This type of paragraph points out details to help user installation/configuration.
NOTE:
This type of paragraph calls readers’ attention to a notice or related theme.
CAUTION!
This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment, etc. which may cause damage or improper
functioning of the equipment if not carried out correctly and may not be clear at first sight.
WARNING!
This type of paragraph indicates things, procedures, adjustments, etc. which demand a high level of
attention, otherwise personal injury or death may occur.
1.2 Conformity Declaration
The following described machine complies with the appropriate basic safety and
health requirement of the EC Low Voltage Directive No: 73/23 / EEC and EC
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336 / EEC based on its design and type, as
brought into circulation by us.
NT
2 System overview
2.1 General description

NT
InteliCompact (also IC-NT) Family controllers are comprehensive gen-set controllers for single and
multiple generating sets operating in stand-by or parallel modes. A modular construction allows
upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to provide the best solution for various customer
applications. The controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and
bar graphs for intuitive operation, which, together with its high level of functionality, sets new
standards in Gen-set controls.
The key features are:
 Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most
applications
 Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
 Excellent remote communication capabilities
 High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
 High reliability
2.2 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each
individual application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and
using the powerful ComAp PC/mobile tools.
Supported configuration and monitoring tools:
- LiteEdit – complete configuration and single gen-set monitoring
- InteliMonitor – multiple site monitoring and setpoint setting
- WinScope – special graphical monitoring software
- WebSupervisor – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
o WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smartphones
NOTE:
Use the LiteEdit PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.
NT
The firmware of InteliCompact contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all
necessary functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same
gen-set and also the controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of
the main tasks of the configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical”
hardware inputs and outputs.
Configuration parts:
1. Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input
terminals
2. Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
3. Assigning sensor characteristics and alarms to analog inputs
4. Assigning control values and output characteristics to analog outputs
5. Selection of peripheral modules which are connected to the controller and doing the same as
the above for them
6. Selection of ECU type if an ECU is connected
7. Changing the language of the controller interface
NT
Physical input terminals
CONFIGURATION OF
BINARY INPUTS AND
OUTPUTS
“Logical” inputs Alarm

management
Main program (control loop)
“Logical” outputs FIRMWARE
CONTROLLER
Physical output terminals
PRINCIPLE OF BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION
The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard
applications. This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the LiteEdit software.
See LiteEdit documentation for details.
NOTE:
You need one of communication modules to connect the controller to a PC with LiteEdit. There is a
special easy removable service module for cases when no communication module is permanently
attached.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for
backup purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .aic. An archive contains a full
image of the controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware.
Besides configuration it also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy
of the history log and a copy of the alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical
configuration and settings.
2.2.1 LiteEdit
NT NT
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliCompact , InteliLite and other controllers. See more in
LiteEdit Reference Guide.
This tool provides the following functions:
- Direct, modem or internet communication with
the controller
- Offline or online controller configuration
- Controller firmware upgrade
- Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
- Reading of measured values
- Browsing of controller history records
- Exporting data into a XLS file
- Controller language translation
NT
2.2.2 InteliMonitor
PC Monitoring tool for Inteli controllers. See more in the
InteliMonitor Reference Guide.
- Online monitoring of a controller or whole site
- Fully customizable SCADA diagram
- Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
2.2.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software. See
more in the WinScope Reference guide.
- Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
- View of actual/historic trends in controller
- On-line change of controllers’ parameters for
easy regulator setup
2.2.4 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling ComAp controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor
webpage.
- Site and fleet monitoring
- On-line notification of alarms
- E-mail notification
- Also available as a smartphone application
NT
2.3 Applications overview
2.3.1 Single applications

The typical scheme of a single parallel to mains application is shown below. The controller controls
two breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers is required.
MCB GCB
3x
3x 3x G1 ECU
3Ph UG
3Ph IG
3Ph UM
K4 K3
MCB GCB
GCB CLOSE/OPEN AVRi IG-AVRi AVR
InteliCompactNT
MCB CLOSE/OPEN BO
SPtM SG+ SPEED GOVERNOR
BI CAN1
MCB ECU
MCB FEEDBACK
GCB
GCB FEEDBACK
SINGLE PARALLEL TO MAINS APPLICATION
2.3.2 Multiple applications

The typical schemes are multiple island-parallel application without mains and multiple parallel
application with mains. Both are shown below. The controller controls one breaker only, the generator
breaker. Feedback from the generator breaker is required. For parallel to mains operation also mains
breaker feedback is required.
GCB
3x
3x G1 ECU
3Ph UG
3Ph IG
3Ph UB
K3
GCB
AVRi IG-AVRi AVR
GCB CLOSE/OPEN InteliCompactNT
BO
MINT SG+ SPEED GOVERNOR
BI CAN2 CAN1
SYS START/STOP ECU
GCB
GCB FEEDBACK CAN
GCB
3x G2 ECU
3Ph UG
3Ph IG
3Ph UB
K3
GCB
AVRi IG-AVRi AVR
BO
BI CAN2 CAN1
SYS START/STOP ECU
START/STOP GCB
GCB FEEDBACK CAN
ISLAND-PARALLEL OPERATION WITHOUT MAINS
NT
MCB GCB
3x
3x 3x G1 ECU
3Ph UG
3Ph IG
3Ph UB
K4 K3
MCB GCB
IG-AVRi
3Ph UM
AVRi AVR
3Ph IM
3Ph UB
BO
BI CAN2 CAN1
GCB
GCB FEEDBACK ECU
MCB CLOSE/OPEN
MCB FEEDBACK
BO MainsCompactNT SYS START/STOP CAN
BI
GCB
CAN
SYS START/STOP
3x G2 ECU
MCB FDB MIRROR
3Ph UG
3Ph IG
REM START/STOP
3Ph UB
K3
MCB
MCB FEEDBACK GCB
AVRi IG-AVRi AVR
BO
GCB BI CAN2 CAN1
GCB FEEDBACK ECU
MCB FEEDBACK
SYS START/STOP CAN
ISLAND-PARALLEL OPERATION WITH AMF AND WITHOUT PARALLELING
2.4 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on the True RMS principle. This principle corresponds
exactly to the physical definition of alternating voltage and current effective values. Under normal
circumstances the mains voltage and current should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However,
some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce harmonic waveforms with frequencies of
multiples of the basic mains frequency and this may result in deformation of the voltage and/or current
waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values not only for
pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
NOTE:
The harmonic deformation causes that the Power Factor of a generator working parallel with the
mains cannot reach values in a certain range around the PF 1.00. The higher the deformation, the
wider the power factor dead range. If the requested power factor is adjusted inside the dead range,
the controller cannot reach the requested value because of this fact.
NT
3 Installation
3.1 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. The requested cut-out size is 175x115 mm.
Use the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described in the
pictures below.
3.2 Package contents

The package contains:
 Controller
 Mounting holders
 Terminal blocks
NOTE:
The package does not contain a communication module. The required module should be ordered
separately.
NT
3.3 Dimensions
185 58
168 47
29
InteliCompact NT
125
110
80
+ -
D+
Mounting cutout size: 175 x 115 mm
NOTE:
The dimensions are in millimetres and are the same for both versions – SPTM and MINT.
NT
3.4 Terminal diagram
MINT
SPTM
3.5 General
To ensure proper function:
 Use grounding terminals.
 Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
 Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than
3 m.
NT
3.6 Wiring
Tightening torque, allowed wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
 Based on terminal type:
1. PA256:
SPECIFIED TIGHTENING TORQUE 0.5 NM (4.4 IN-LB)

2. 2EDGK:
SPECIFIED TIGHTENING TORQUE 0.4 NM (3.5 IN-LB)

 For field type terminals:
Use only diameter 2.0–0.5 mm (12–26 AWG) conductor, rated for 75 °C minimum.
 For Mains (Bus) Voltage and Generator Voltage terminals
Use only diameter 2.0-0.5 mm (12–26 AWG) conductor, rated for 90 °C minimum.
 Use copper conductors only.
3.7 Grounding
2
The shortest possible piece of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2.5 mm .
A brass M4x10 screw with star washer securing ring type grounding terminal shall be used.
The negative “-” battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at a common point. Use as short a cable as
possible to the grounding point.
3.8 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
2
Use min. power supply cable of 1.5 mm
The maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The maximum allowable power
supply voltage is 39 V DC. The InteliCompact’s power supply terminals are protected against large
pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected to
conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between the generator current COM terminal
and the battery “-” terminal is maximum ± 2 V. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to
interconnect these two terminals together.
HINT:
NT
The InteliCompact controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes!!
The maximum allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4A (this is dependent on
binary output load).
NT
NT
For connection with a 12 V DC power supply, the InteliCompact includes internal capacitors that
allow the controller to continue operation during cranking if the battery voltage dip occurs. If the battery
voltage is 10 V before the dip and it recovers to 7 V within 100 ms the controller continues operating.
During this voltage dip, the controller screen backlight may turn on and off but the controller keeps
operating.
It is possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode or I-LBA module:
Starter
- +
Relays
T1A D Controller
+
+
-
C
- +
12 VDC Battery
The capacitor size depends on the required time. It shall be approximately in the thousands of
microfarads.
The capacitor size should be 5000 microfarad to withstand a 150 ms voltage dip under the following
conditions:
Voltage before dip is 12 V, after 150 ms the voltage recovers to the min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.
HINT:
Before the battery is discharged the message "Low BackupBatt" appears.
Or by connecting a special I-LBA Low Battery Adaptor module:

Starter
- +
Relays
T1A Controller
+ +
+
I-LBA
- -
-
- +
12 VDC Battery
The I-LBA module ensures a min. 350 ms voltage dip under following conditions:
 Communication and extension plug-in modules are connected.
 Voltage before dip is 12 V and after 350 ms the voltage recovers to the min. allowed voltage
5 V.
 The I-LBA enables controller operation from 5 V DC (for 10 to 30 seconds).
 The wiring resistance from the battery should be up to 0.1 Ω for proper function of the I-LBA.
HINT:
I-LBA may not eliminate voltage drop when used with the low temperature (-40 °C) version of the
controller and the display heating element is on (below 5 °C). The current drain of the heating element
exhausts LBA capacitors very fast.
NT
3.8.1 Power supply fusing
A one-amp fuse should be connected in line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and
modules. These items should never be connected directly to the starting battery.
Fuse value and type depends on the number of connected devices and wire length.
The recommended fuse type (not fast) is T1A due to internal capacitors charging during
power up.
+
IC-NT
-
T1A
+ -
Battery HUGE
LOADS
STARTER
3.9 Voltage and current inputs

WARNING!
Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals under voltage! Be
sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
WARNING!
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed!!! Open
the primary circuit first!
2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection.
Adjust nominal voltage, nominal current, CT ratio and PT ratio by appropriate setpoints in the Basic
Settings group. Learn about how to view and change setpoints in the User interface chapter.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT WIRING
A)
L1
G L2
L3
N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
GENERATOR MAINS / BUS
NT
B)
L1
G L2
L3
N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
C)
L1
G L2
L3
N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
D)
L1
Wiring to be used with IC-NT-
G MINT-MonoPhase or IC-NT-
SPTM-MonoPhase archive for
Mono or Single Phase
N applications.
N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
CURRENT MEASUREMENT WIRING
E)
K L
L1
k l
G K
k
L
l
K L
L2
L3
k l
COM
L1 L2 L3
NT
NOTE:
IT IS NECESSARY TO ENSURE THAT THE POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE GENERATOR CURRENT COM
TERMINAL AND THE BATTERY “-” TERMINAL IS MAXIMUM ± 2V. THEREFORE, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED TO
INTERCONNECT THESE TWO TERMINALS TOGETHER.
CAUTION:
NT
W HEN YOU ARE USING INTELICOMPACT HW VERSION 1.3 OR NEWER IT IS NECESSARY TO UPGRADE THE
FIRMWARE TO IC-NT-1.4.3 OR NEWER.
NT
Since HW version 1.3 the InteliCompact measures current with reversed polarity. It is not
recommended to switch wiring at the current transformer side. To fix this error use FW IC-NT-1.4.3 or
newer.
3.10 Speed measurement

The engine speed can be measured either from the generator frequency or from a magnetic pickup. If
an EFI engine is configured, the engine speed is obtained from the ECU.
3.10.1 Pickup
A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To
use this method, mount the pickup opposite to the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller
as shown on the picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth according to the number of teeth on
the flywheel.
See the chapter Technical data for details about the pickup input parameters.
COM
RPM
+
D+
Pickup
D+ (L)
Charging alternator T2A
+ -
RPM measurement from the pickup.
D+ terminal from the charging alternator can be used as additional signal for
detection of running engine.
NT
3.10.2 Generator frequency
If the pickup is not used, set the setpoint Gear Teeth to zero. The engine speed will be measured from
the generator frequency. Connect the W terminal from the charging alternator instead of the pickup, if
possible. See picture below.
COM
RPM
+
D+
-
D+ (L)
T2A
Charging alternator
+ -
RPM is measured from generator frequency.
D+ and W terminals from the charging alternator can be used as additional signals
for detection of running engine.
3.10.3 Additional running engine indication

It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not,
especially if RPM is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The
generator frequency measurement can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed
reaction to sudden and big changes (i.e. in the moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
 Voltage on the D+ input is higher than 80% of battery voltage. Connect this input to the D+ (L)
terminal of the charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Function. If
D+ terminal is not available, leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
 The pickup is not used and frequency is detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup
input to the W terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal
is available. If not, leave the input unconnected.
NOTE:
The starter cut-off frequency has to be adjusted by the setpoint Start W Freq. If you know the charging
alternator nominal frequency, adjust the setpoint to the frequency obtained from following equation:
"𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑅𝑃𝑀"
𝑓cutoff = 𝑓nom ∙ ( )
"𝑁𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑅𝑃𝑀"
If you do not know the charging alternator nominal frequency, follow this procedure:
1) Make sure that the starting accumulator is fully charged.
2) Close a fuel valve manually to disable the engine from being started.
NT
3) Connect a PC with LiteEdit to the controller and display "Values" window, group "Engine", value
W-TerminalFreq.
4) Select MAN mode and press the Start button to crank the gen-set. Make a note about the W
terminal frequency while the gen-set is cranking.
5) Press the Stop button to stop cranking.
6) Adjust the setpoint Start W Freq to a value twice that which you measured during cranking.
 Oil pressure > Starting Oil P setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog input 1 or
from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
 At least one phase of generator voltage is >20% of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if still no RPM is
measured and also during stop in order to evaluate if the engine is really stopped.
3.11 Binary inputs

2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary inputs.
NOTE:
The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the
configuration.
To the microprocessor
4k7
+ -
W IRING OF BINARY INPUTS
3.12 Binary outputs

2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic
below for all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
NOTE:
The function of each output has to be assigned during configuration.
CAUTION!
Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!
NT
From the
microprocessor
+ -
W IRING OF BINARY OUTPUTS

NOTE:
Outputs can provide steady current of up to 2A. Every single binary output can provide up to 0.5A of
steady current unless the total current of all binary outputs does not exceed 2A.
3.13 Analog inputs

The analog inputs are designed for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON. The
sensors are connected either by one wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.
 In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to
the sensors as possible.
 In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply
terminal of the controller as well as the opposite poles of the sensors.
NOTE:
The fail sensor alarm is issued if the measured resistance is smaller than one half of the first (lowest)
point of the sensor curve characteristic or is greater than 112.5% of the last (highest) point of the
sensor curve characteristic.
NOTE:
Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Water Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these
parameters are connected with relevant protections.
Protection of Oil Pressure and the relevant condition of a running engine is joined with AI01 only if:
- the ECU is not configured
- the ECU is configured and the AI01 is set to Alarm + ECU.
NT
AI COM
AI
- +
W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – GROUNDED SENSORS

AI COM
AI
- +
W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – ISOLATED SENSORS
3.13.1 Tristate inputs

Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit
check. The threshold level is 750Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10Ω and values over
2400Ω are evaluated as sensor failure (short or open circuit).
BINARY
AI COM
TRISTATE 100R
- +
P T
1k5
W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – USED AS BINARY OR TRI-STATE

NOTE:
The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.
NT
3.14 Circuit breakers
There are two power switches controlled by the controller:
 The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB

 The Mains circuit breaker or contactor – MCB (SPtM application only)
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control
outputs that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when
designing the wiring of power switches:
 The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in
such a way, that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open
and close the breaker at any time.
 The breaker must respond within max. 2 seconds to a close and open command. Special
attention should be paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 2
seconds on some types. In such cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast
opening.
 The breaker feedback functions must be configured onto some binary inputs and the signals
from the breakers must be connected to it and provide reliable information about the breaker
position.
3.14.1 Breaker control outputs

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position
Close/open requested by the controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or
open command, otherwise an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The
ON coil
output is intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse
OFF coil lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds. The output is
intended for control of open coils of circuit breakers.
The output is active the whole time the gen-set is running (GCB, not in idle or
cooling) or the controller is switched on (MCB). The output is deactivated for at least
UV coil
2 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off. The output is intended
for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.
CLOSE/OPEN
2s
ON COIL
2s
OFF COIL
UV COIL
FEEDBACK
BREAKER OUTPUTS TIMING
NT
3.14.2 MCB special requirements
SPtM only
1. If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in
such a way that the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the MCB Close/Open
closes. This behaviour is called “negative logic” and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB
Logic. The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is
switched off.
2. If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have
failed, because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary
to prevent triggering the MCB fail alarm: MCB Opens On = MAINSFAIL, Mains V Del ≤ 1.
3. If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is
not fitted, it is not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no
power for the motor drive until the gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the
setpoint MCB Opens On = GEN RUN will prevent triggering the MCB fail alarm.
3.15 AVR interface

The AVR output is used to control the voltage or power factor of the generator via the remote voltage
adjust input provided by the AVR.
The output from the controller is a 5V PWM that is designed to be used together with the IG-AVRi
module. The AVRi module provides galvanic separation of the controller from the generator and PWM
to voltage conversion, which is needed for most AVRs. The output from the IG-AVRi module is
available as positive, negative or symmetric. The output voltage range is adjustable by a trimmer
located on the module.
The initial level of the AVR output is adjustable by the setpoint AVRi Bias.
3.15.1 IG-AVRi
Automatic voltage Regulator interface is used for volt/PF control adjustment through galvanic
separated inputs and outputs.
CAUTION:
Refer each time to the corresponding AVR manual before connecting the interface. IG-AVRi-TRANS
(AC power supply for AVRi) has to be supplied from gen-set voltage.
AVRi output can be connected as symmetrical: OUT1-OUT2 or unsymmetrical OUT1-GND or OUT2-

GND.
- The potentiometer on the AVRi defines maximum OUT1, OUT2 voltage range.
- Use symmetrical (OUT1, OUT2) AVRi output to connect the AVRi to AVR auxiliary voltage
input.
- Use unsymmetrical output if an external AVR potentiometer has to be replaced with AVRi.
- AVRi output voltage should change the generator voltage typically in the range ± 10% of the
Nominal voltage.
NOTE:
IG-AVRi is not included in the standard package with the controller.
IG-AVRi TRANS/LV is a power supply unit for IG-AVRi; it is not included with the IG-AVRi package.
OUT1
Output terminals for alternator
GND
AVR
Output OUT2
AC1 Power supply from IG-AVRi
AC3 TRANS/LV
Output level Set output voltage bias
AVRI
Input Input signals from the controller
AO GND
NT
AO GND
AVRI
AVR
VOLTAGE GENERATOR
ADJUST VOLTAGE
IG-AVRI MODULE WIRING
NT
AVRi output
OUT1 - OUT2 [V]
AVRi trim turned in max.
10 V position (clockwise)
AVRi trim turned in min.

2V position
(counterclockwise)
0 50 100 [%]
AVR output
-2V
-10 V
SYMMETRIC AVRI OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
AVRi output
OUT1 - GND
10 V position (clockwise)

2V position (counterclockwise)
0 100 [%]
AVR output
AVRi output
OUT2 - GND
10 V
position (clockwise)
2V
0 100 [%]
AVR output

position
(counterclockwise)
ASYMMETRIC AVRI OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
NT
3.15.2 AVR list
3.15.2.1 LeRoy-Somer
LeRoy-Somer: R 438 LS, R448
Kutai EA448
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

18VAC AVRi 0VAC generator clockwise.
TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM iG- AVRI AVR Bias = 50%
ST4 AO GND
OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

terminals ST4. Module R726 is not required.
LeRoy-Somer: R 449

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
3 AVR Bias = 50%

ST4 2 AO GND
OUT1
Module R726 is not required.
LeRoy-Somer: R 450

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
OUT1
HINT:
Use AVRi instead of potentiometer 1kΩ.
Read LeRoy-Somer R450 manual before use.
LeRoy-Somer: R 129

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
J2 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

terminal J2. Module R726 is not required.
NT
LeRoy-Somer: R 128

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
4 AVR Bias = 50%
AO GND
5 OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

terminals 4 and 5.
LeRoy-Somer: R 221, R 222
18 VAC 230/ 400VAC from generator

IG-
AVRi 0 VAC
TRANS
AVRi AO GND
OUT2 AVRI
AVRI
iG-
AO GND
OUT1

AVRi trim to minimum counter
clockwise +5%.
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVR Bias = 24%
LeRoy-Somer: R 250

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
AVR Bias = 50%

J2 AO GND
OUT1
NT
LeRoy-Somer: R 230

TRANS
AO GND Volt/PF ctrl:

OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
AVR Bias = 50%
J4 AO GND
OUT1
500
Remove Link J4 and replace instead of R500
Primary voltage setting with resistors connected: 230 V
HINT:
Disconnect one wire (OUT 1), set voltage on running Generator to U = nom.
Measure Voltage over Resistor
Depending on Value, increase AVRi potentiometer to get Range.
Set exact Value with Bias Voltage//PF regulation (gain = 0)
Stop gen-set and connect when equal Voltage and polarity is achieved.
Set again in regulation loop on demand
LeRoy-Somer: R 230
IG- 230/ 400VAC from generator

AVRi 0 VAC
TRANS
AO GND
AVRi
AVRI
iG-
OUT2
AVRI
AO GND
OUT1

AVRi trim to minimum counter clockwise. Volt/PF ctrl:
AVR Bias = 50%
NT
LeRoy-Somer: R 449

AVRi 0VAC generator clockwise
TRANS
5
AO GND
4
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
3 AVR Bias = 50%
ST4 2 AO GND
OUT1
1
3.15.2.2 Stamford
STAMFORD SX 460
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to approx. 60 %

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
1 AVR Bias = 60-70%

AO GND
2 OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead of external resistor for voltage adjusting. Voltage range (-6 V; 6 V)
HINT:
Before you connect IG-AVRi you should connect the jumper on AVR between pin 1 and 2 to run the voltage
regulator without external control and set the voltage by the voltage trim on SX460 to roughly 227 V (in the
event that the nominal voltage of the system is 230 V).
STAMFORD SX 440, AS440, MX 321, SX 421

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
A1 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
A2 OUT1
PFC3 module is not required.
STAMFORD AS480
IG-
230 /400 VAC From Volt/PF ctrl:
18VAC AVRi 0VAC generator
TRANS AVR Bias = 30%
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
1 AVRI
iG-
AVRI
2 OCOM AO GND
AVRi output is connected instead of external resistor for voltage adjusting.
NT
STAMFORD MX 341

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
A1 AVR Bias = 50%
AO GND
A2 OUT1
HINT:
Disconnect the droop CT (terminal S1 & S2) and short the droop CT leads.
Short the terminal S1,S2 on the AVR
3.15.2.3 AVK Newage

AVK Newage Cosimat N+
IG- 230/400VAC From

TRANS
OCOM Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
2
5R5
AVR Bias = 25%
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
t 1
250R
AO GND
S OUT1
AVK Newage MA330, 327, 321, 341

2 18VAC AVRi 0VAC generator clockwise
TRANS
1
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
A1 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
A2
OUT1
3.15.2.4 Caterpillar
Caterpillar CDVR
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to 50%

TRANS
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
OUT2 AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
12-3
AO GND
12-6 OUT1
NT
Caterpillar DVR
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to 25%

TRANS
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
7
AO GND
45 OUT1
Pin 44 on DVR – PF regulation directly from DVR is not connected.
Caterpillar VR6, VR3F

TRANS
AO GND
TR5 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
TR6 AVR Bias

AO GND
TR7 OUT1
For VR3F link 4-7 has to be removed.
Caterpillar VR6-B

4 18VAC AVRi 0VAC generator clockwise.
TRANS
7
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
2 AVR Bias = 0%
AO GND
3
OUT1
Voltage range (-2 V; 2 V)
3.15.2.5 Basler
Basler: APR 63-5, AEC 63-7, KR-FX, KR-FFX

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
7 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
6 OUT1
Basler: DECS 100

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
B AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
A OUT1
NT
Basler: DESC 200

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
A10 AVR Bias = 50%
AO GND
A9 OUT1
3.15.2.6 Marathon
Marathon DVR2000E
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to 1/3 clockwise

TRANS
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
OUT2 AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
B
AO GND
A OUT1
Marathon PM100, 200
IG- 230/400VAC From Volt/PF ctrl:

18VAC AVRi 0VAC generator AVR Bias = 50%
TRANS
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
6
AO GND
7 OUT1
3.15.2.7 Marelli
MarelliMotori Mark I (M40FA640A/A)

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
8
AO GND
6 OUT1
MarelliMotori (M40FA610A)
Volt/PF ctrl:
230/400VAC From
IG-
generator AVR Bias = 50%
18VAC AVRi 0VAC
TRANS
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
8
AO GND
6 OUT1
NT
MarelliMotori Mark V (M16FA655A)
AVRi trim to 1/4 position
230/400VAC From
IG- AVRi generator
18VAC TRANS 0VAC Volt/PF ctrl:
AVR Bias = 15%
AO GND
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
P
AO GND
Q OUT1
3.15.2.8 Mecc Alte SpA

Mecc Alte SpA: U.V.R.6
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to maximum

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
AVR Bias = 75%

AO GND
OCOM
AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 100 KΩ

(OUT2= top position wire and GND = second position from top).
Mecc Alte SpA: S.R.7/2

TRANS
AO GND
Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
5B AVR Bias = 75%

AO GND
7 OUT1
Mecc Alte UVR

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
8 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
6 OUT1
Mecc Alte DER1

AVRi trim to 1/16 from
230/400VAC From
IG-
generator minimum.
18VAC AVRi 0VAC
TRANS

AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
OCOM AVRI
iG-
29
AO GND
30 OUT1
NT
Mecc Alte DSR
11
10
IG- 230/ 400VAC from generator

AVRi 0 VAC
TRANS
AO GND
AVRi
AVRI
iG-
OCOM AVRI
AO GND
OUT1
Generator AVRi trim = 1/16 from minimum

voltage (= 6.25% → max. = 2.5 V).
114%
(or 105%) Volt/PF ctrl:
AVR Bias = 50%
Nominal voltage
100%
set on DSR
86%
(or 95%)
0V 1.25V 2.5V DSR input voltage (10-11)
IG-AVRi output voltage (OUT1-GND)
The Vext input (connector CN1 – terminals 10 and 11) permits analog remote control of output voltage with a
programmable variation range of up to ±10% (parameter 16, by default the setting is ±5%) with respect to the
value set. If you want to use continuous voltage, it will be effective if it is in the range between 0 V and
+2.5 V. The input tolerates voltages from -5 V to +5 V, but for values exceeding the limits of 0 V / +2.5 V (or
in the event of disconnection) it is automatically disabled and the voltage adjustment goes back to the value
set through the trimmer (if enabled) or through parameter 19 (as shown on the picture).
Changing the DSR parameters requires a PC with dedicated software and a DI1-DSR unit!
DSR automatically detects the presence of a transformer for parallel operation (if used it works with droop, if
not used then it works isochronous).
NT
3.15.2.9 Piller
Piller

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
1 iG- AVRI AVR Bias = 39%
AO GND
2 OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 100 kΩ.
3.15.2.10 Marathon
Marathon DVR2000E
IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to 1/3 clockwise

TRANS
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
OUT2 AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
B
AO GND
A OUT1
Marathon PM100, 200

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
6
AO GND
7 OUT1
3.15.2.11 KATO
KATO KCR 360

TRANS
AO GND
OUT2
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
8
AO GND
6 OUT1
NT
KATO KCR 760
TRANS
AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
R2 AVR Bias = 45%
AO GND
R1 OUT1
KATO K-65-12B
4 TRANS
7 AO GND
OUT2 Volt/PF ctrl:
AVRi
AVRI
AVRI
iG-
2 AVR Bias = 50%

AO GND
3 OUT1
3.15.2.12 ENGGA
ENGGA WT-2
230/400VAC From AVRi trim to 1/3 clockwise
IG- AVRi generator
18VAC TRANS 0VAC
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND
AVR Bias = 50%
AVRi
AVRI
A- OUT2 AVRI
IG-
AO GND
A+ OUT1
ENGGA WT-3
230/400VAC From Volt/PF ctrl:
IG- AVRi generator
18VAC TRANS 0VAC AVR Bias = 50%
AO GND
AVRI
AVRi
A2 OUT2 AVRI
IG-
A1 OUT1
AO GND
3.15.2.13 Sincro
Sincro AVR BL3 or BL4
230/400VAC From AVRi trim to middle position
IG- AVRi generator
18VAC TRANS 0VAC
Volt/PF ctrl:
AO GND AVR Bias = 20%
AVRi
AVRI
COM AVRI
IG-
POT
EXT AO GND
OUT1
NT
3.15.2.14 Kutai
Kutai EA448
230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter
IG- AVRi generator
18VAC TRANS 0VAC clockwise.
AVRi
AVRI
COM AVRI
IG-
AVR Bias = 50%
ST4 AO GND
OUT1
AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 470Ω to

terminals ST4. Module R726 is not required.
NT
3.16 Speed governor interface
The speed governor output is used to control the speed or the power of the engine via the remote
speed controlling input provided by the speed governor.
The output from the controller can work in the following modes:
 voltage mode 0 to 10 V
 voltage mode 0 to 10 V with serial 10k resistor
 5 V PWM mode
NOTE:
The PWM mode is designed and optimized for Caterpillar governors. Since IC-NT SW v. 1.4.4 speed
governor PWM frequency is fixed to 500 Hz.
The jumpers for speed governor output mode are shown on the picture below.
VoutR
PWM
Vout
The initial level of the governor output is adjustable by the setpoint Speed Gov Bias and the
characteristic (positive or negative) can be selected by the setpoint Speed Gov Char.
The active range of the output can be adapted to the governor input range by setpoints
SpeedGovLowLim and SpeedGovHiLim.
NOTE:
Some governors may evaluate input voltage out of the allowed range as a faulty condition and their
functioning may be blocked.
NT
3.16.1 Speed governor list
3.16.1.1
Speed Control Woodward
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
15 ± SG +
2301A
Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

16 COM AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE
Speed control
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
2301 LS &
25 + SG + Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

26 - AO COM VoutR
SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
DPG 2201
ILS:9 470k SG + Speed Gov Bias = 2.50 V

GND:2 AO COM VoutR
SpeedGovLowLim = 0 V
SpeedGovHiLim = 5 V
For Woodward DPG 2223 the ILS terminal is 10.
Sync/Load Ctrl:
WOODWARD
11+ SG + Speed Gov Bias = 1.50 V

EPG
12 - AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

SpeedGovHiLim = 3 V
HINT:
NT
For Woodward EPG speed governor (revision F) is in case of InteliCompact limit:
Speed Gov Bias = 1 V
SpeedGovHiLim = 2 V
230/400VAC From
iG-
AVRi generator
0VAC
18VAC
TRANS
WOODWARD
Options 2
SG+ Sync/Load Ctrl:

EPG
AVRi
OUT2 Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

iG-
PWM
OUT1 AO COM
NT
7 Sync/Load Ctrl:
8 SG + Speed Gov Bias = 3.10 V
EPG 1712/512
WOODWARD
2 AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

1724/524
6 SpeedGovLowLim = 6.5 V
5 MPU SpeedGovHiLim = 0 V
4
3 Actuator
230/400VAC From
iG-
AVRi generator
0VAC
18VAC
TRANS
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
ProAct II
SG+ Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

AVRi
iG-
13 OUT2 PWM SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

12 OUT1 AO COM
3k3
Speed Control
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
19 SG +
2301D

Terminals 19 and 20 are marked as analog inputs #1.

25, 26 = Speed Signal Inputs
WOODWARD
Sync/Load Ctrl:
L-series
8 (Aux1) SG +
5 AO COM VoutR
SpeedGovHiLim = 5 V
Speed Control
WOODWARD
Flo-tech
11 SG + Sync/Load Ctrl:
12 AO COM VoutR Speed Gov Bias = 0.00 V
NT
3.16.1.2 Cummins
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Cummins
11 SG +
QST30

20 AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar =
POSITIVE
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Cummins
I9 SG + Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

ECPG
Vout
A1 AO COM SpeedGovChar =
POSITIVE
Pay attention to the connector and jumper orientation.
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Cummins
5V 10k SG + Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V

ONAN
0V AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar =

POSITIVE
4µ7/50V Sync/Load Ctrl:

Cummins
SpeedGovChar =
EFC
8 200k SG + POSITIVE
VoutR SpeedGovLowLim = 5 V
11 AO COM
SpeedGovHiLim = 7.8 V
Setting at 1500 RPM: Primary setting governor with disconnected speed regulation lines.
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Cummins
9 SG + Vout SpeedGovChar =
QSL9
32 AO COM POSITIVE
SpeedGovLowLim = 2.5 V
SpeedGovHiLim = 5 V
NT
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Cummins Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V
GCS 03-11 SG + SpeedGovChar =
03-12 AO COM VoutR POSITIVE
3.16.1.3 Caterpillar
Caterpillar
9 SG +
PEEC
19 AO COM
PWM
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Caterpillar
Converter
2 SG +
Signal

67k7 SpeedGovLowLim = 0 V
SpeedGovHiLim = 10 V
Caterpillar
12 SG +
ADEM
10 AO COM
PWM
3.16.1.4 MTU
Sync/Load Ctrl:
MTU MDEC
2000, 4000
8 SG + SpeedGovChar =
Vout
36 AO COM POSITIVE
NT
3.16.1.5 Deutz
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Vout
23 AO COM SpeedGovChar =
DEUTZ
PLUG F
BF6M
POSITIVE
21
Opened for SpeedGovLowLim = 0.5 V
17 0% droop SpeedGovHiLim = 4.5 V
3.16.1.6 Perkins
Sync/Load Ctrl:
connector (ECM connector)
24 (J1/17) SG + Speed Gov Bias = 2.50 V

Customer interface
Vout
2300, 2800
PERKINS
20 (J1/3) AO COM SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

2 (J1/49)
12 (J1/18)
Sync/Load Ctrl:
RPS INPUT SG + Speed Gov Bias = 2.50 V
PERKINS
1300 EDi
VBREF GND AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

Sync/Load Ctrl:
4016 E61 TRS

Vout
PERKINS
19 AO COM SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

3.16.1.7 GAC
Sync/Load Ctrl:
ESD 5500
N SG + SpeedGovChar =
GAC
G AO COM VoutR
NEGATIVE
SpeedGovHiLim = 6 V
NT
ESD 5330 Sync/Load Ctrl:
M SG + Speed Gov Bias = 5.00 V
GAC
AUX
G AO COM VoutR SpeedGovChar =
NEGATIVE
Sync/Load Ctrl:
EGS 104B
GAC
2 AO COM VoutR NEGATIVE

SpeedGovHiLim = 6 V
Sync/Load Ctrl:
SDG 735
A SG + SpeedGovChar =
GAC
L AO COM VoutR NEGATIVE

TauSpeedActuat = 1 s
3.16.1.8 Barber Colman

Barber Colman
Sync/Load Ctrl:
DYNA 8000

SpeedGovHiLim = 8 V
Barber Colman
Sync/Load Ctrl:
DYN1 10684

SpeedGovHiLim = 8 V
3.16.1.9 Heinzmann
Heinzman E6
Sync/Load Ctrl:
9 150k SG + Speed Gov Bias = 0.00 V
NT
Sync/Load Ctrl:
Heinzman

E16
5 Sync/Load Ctrl:
Heinzman
KG-1-03F

GND
Sync/Load Ctrl:
PANDAROS
Heinzman
1 (B3) SG + SpeedGovChar = POSITIVE

DC6
3 (A3) AO COM VoutR SpeedGovLowLim = 0.8 V

10k Without resistor
Terminals A3 and B3 are on OEM 14-pin connector. SpeedGovLowLim = 0 V
Mounted on Perkins 40xx engines. SpeedGovHiLim = 6 V
3.16.1.10 Toho
Sync/Load Ctrl:
TOHO

10k
3.16.1.11 ComAp
Sync/Load Ctrl:
ECON 4
Vout
7 AO COM POSITIVE
NT
3.17 CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules
are observed:
 The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of
250 kbps, which is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU) and CAN2 bus if it is
switched to 32C mode, the maximum length is 200 m. If the CAN2 bus is switched to 8C mode
the speed is 50 kbps and the maximum length is 800 m.
 The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are
allowed except on the controller terminals.
NOTE:
A termination resistor at the CAN is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
 Use a cable with following parameters:
Cable type Shielded twisted pair
Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)

2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2dB/100 m
120R 120R
CAN BUS TOPOLOGY
NOTE:
See the website www.can-cia.org for information about the CAN bus, specifications, etc.
NT
3.18 Recommended CAN/RS485 connection
3.18.1 CAN bus connection

The bus has to be terminated by 120 Ω resistors at both ends. External units can be connected on the
CAN bus line in any order, but keeping a line arrangement (no tails, no star) is necessary. Standard
maximum bus length is 200 m for 32C CAN BUS MODE and 900 m for 8C CAN BUS MODE. Shielded
cable must be used. Shielding has to be connected to PE on one side (controller side).
1. For shorter distances (all network components within one room) – picture 1
Interconnect H and L; shielding connect to PE on controller side
2. For longer distances (connection between rooms within one building) – picture 2
Interconnect H, L, COM; shielding connect to PE at one point
3. In case of surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) – picture 3
We recommend using the following protections:
 Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-BE
(base element)
 Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ
Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com)
1. For shorter distances: 3105A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors)
2. For longer distances: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
3. In case of surge hazard: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
3.18.2 RS485 connection

The line has to be terminated by 120 Ω resistors at both ends. External units can be connected on the
RS485 line in any order, but keeping a line arrangement (no tails, no star) is necessary. Standard
maximum link length is 1000 m. Shielded cable must be used. Shielding has to be connected to PE on
one side (controller side).
1. For shorter distances (all network components within one room) – picture 1
interconnect A and B; shielding connect to PE on controller side
2. For longer distances (connection between rooms within one building) – picture 2
interconnect A, B, COM; shielding connect to PE at one point
3. In case of surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) – picture 3
We recommend using the following protections:
 Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-BE

(base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL)
 Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ
Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com)
3. In case of surge hazard: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
NT
120 Ω 120 Ω
H/A H/A
L/B L/B
COM COM
PICTURE 1 – SHORTER DISTANCES (ALL NETWORK COMPONENTS WITHIN ONE ROOM)
120
CAN1
CAN2 CAN1
H H
COM COM
L Extension L
1. IC-NT H module
COM 120
Addr.: 1 L
120
CAN2 CAN1
H
COM
L
2. IC-NT H
COM
L
PICTURE 2 – LONGER DISTANCES (CONNECTION BETWEEN ROOMS WITHIN ONE BUILDING)

120 Ω 120 Ω
PT5-HF-12DC-ST (CAN)
PT5HF-5DC-ST (RS485)
H/A 2 1 1 2 H/A
L/B 6 5 5 6 L/B
COM 8 7
IN
7 8 COM
OUT IN OUT
12 11 11 12
10 9 9 10
4 3 3 4
PICTURE 3 – SURGE HAZARD (CONNECTION OUT OF BUILDING IN CASE OF STORM ETC.)
NT
3.19 Extension modules
Extension modules are to be enabled and configured using LiteEdit. Extension modules are not
contained in the factory default configuration.
3.19.1 IGS-PTM
The IGS-PTM is a DIN Rail mounted extension module that is connected to the controller via a CAN1
bus. The module contains:
 8 binary inputs with the same properties and configuration as binary inputs of the controller.
 8 binary outputs with the same properties and configuration as binary outputs of the controller.
 4 analog inputs with selectable electrical range by a jumper: 0–250 Ω, 0–100 mV, 0–20 mA,
suitable for Pt100 and thermocouple sensors
NOTE:
The controller selection jumper (iS/iG) must be in the iG position for using the module with the
NT
InteliCompact .
A separate manual for the IGS-PTM module is available for download on the ComAp web site
NT
3.19.2 IGL-RA15 remote annunciator
The IGL-RA15 module is a remote annunciator that is connected to the controller via a CAN1 bus. The
module contains:
 15 LEDs with configurable colour (red, green, yellow).

 Binary output for driving an external siren.
 Horn reset and Lamp test buttons.
The siren is activated automatically if a new yellow or red LED switches on, the duration is adjustable
and it can be silenced by pressing the horn reset button. In the controller the LEDs are configured like
binary outputs, so all binary output functions can be used to drive the LEDs.
NOTE:
THE ADDRESS SELECTION JUMPERS MUST BE IN THE IG POSITION FOR USING THE MODULE WITH THE
NT
INTELICOMPACT .
A separate manual for the IGL-RA15 module is available for download on the ComAp website
NT
3.19.3 IL-NT-AOUT8
The IL-NT-AOUT8 module is to be directly plugged-in into the slot on the rear side of the controller.
The module contains 8 PWM open collector type outputs. The outputs are specially designed for
driving analog automotive type gauges. Any of the analog values measured or computed in the
controller can be configured to each output and it is possible to configure a different conversion
characteristic (curve) for each output.
NOTE:
The module is compatible with gauges originally designed for resistive sensors, i.e. they have board
voltage compensation. These gauges have 3 terminals: +BATT, SENSOR, GND.
+ BATT
Automotive
type gauge
AO8
AO7
AO6
AO5
- BATT
AO4
AO3
AO2
AO1
+12/24V
GND
AO8
GND
Examples of automotive gauges that can be used with the module:
 VDO Oil pressure gauge 0–10 Bar, p.n. 350-010-007

 VDO Coolant temperature gauge 40–120 °C, p.n. 310-010-002
 VDO Fuel level 0-1/1, p.n. 301-010-001
3.19.4 IL-NT BIO8

Hybrid binary input/output module
IL-NT BIO8 is an optional plug-in card. Through this card the controller can accommodate up to 8
binary inputs or outputs. In the LiteEdit PC configuration tool (version 4.4 and higher) it is possible to
easily choose if a particular I/O will be binary input or output.
NT
To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use a screwdriver to open) and then insert the
module into the slot. Once you have inserted it, the module will snap under the plastic teeth. It is
supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove the
entire back cover and then remove the module manually. Installing the IL-NT BIO8 module is similar to
installing the RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits into the “extension module” slot and
after installing the IL-NT BIO8 you do not put the small cover back.
BATT+
K1
REL K21 K2
OUT BIO1
BIO2
IN BIO3
K11 BIO4
BIO5
BIO6
BIO7
IN BIO8
SW1 BATT-
BATT-
+ -
BATTERY
Technical details:
NT
IL-NT BIO8 plugs into the InteliCompact controller EXTENSION MODULE port.
8 dedicated pins of the plug-in card’s terminal can be configured as binary inputs or outputs.
BINARY INPUTS
Number of inputs 8
Input resistance 4.7 kΩ
Input range 0–36 V DC
Voltage level for close contact indication (Logical 1) < 0.8 V DC
Voltage level for open contact indication (Logical 0) > 2 V DC
Max voltage level for open contact indication 8–36 V DC
BINARY OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 8
Maximum current per pin 0.5 A
Maximum switching common current 2A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
NOTE:
Binary inputs are not galvanically isolated.
NT
3.19.5 IC-NT CT-BIO7
Hybrid current input and binary input/output module (SPtM)
IC-NT CT-BIO7 is an optional plug-in card. Through this card the controller can accommodate one
AC current (CT) measuring input and up to 7 binary inputs or outputs. In the LiteEdit PC configuration
tool (version 4.4 and higher) it is possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or
output.
NOTE:
Current measuring input is intended to measure one phase (AC) current of mains and to limit
Export/Import to/from mains to zero value during parallel to mains operation. This is the case of the
SPtM application, so current input of the IC-NT CT-BIO7 module is useful for SPtM controllers only.
To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use a screwdriver to open) and then insert the
module into the slot. Once you have inserted it, the module will snap under the plastic teeth. It is
supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove the
entire back cover and then remove the module manually. Installing the IC-NT CT-BIO7 module is
similar to installing the RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits into the “extension module”
slot and after installing the IC-NT CT-BIO7 you do not put the small cover back.
MAINS
BATT+ L K
K1 l k L3
REL K21 K2
CT l
0-5A CT k
OUT BIO1
BIO2
IN BIO3
K11 BIO4
BIO5
BIO6
IN BIO7
SW1 BATT-
+ -
BATTERY
Technical details:
NT
IC-NT CT-BIO7 plugs into InteliCompact controller EXTENSION MODULE port.
7 dedicated pins of the plug-in card’s terminal can be configured as binary inputs or outputs.
CURRENT MEASURING INPUT
Number of inputs 1
Nominal input current (from CT) 5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0.1
Max measured current from CT 10 A
Current measurement tolerance 2% from Nominal current
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A
(All values in RMS)
NT
BINARY INPUTS
Number of inputs 7
Input range 0–36 V DC
Voltage level for close contact indication (Logical 1) < 0.8 V DC
Voltage level for open contact indication (Logical 0) > 2 V DC
Max voltage level for open contact indication 8–36 V DC
BINARY OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 7
Maximum current per pin 0.5 A
Maximum switching common current 2A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
NOTE:
Binary inputs are not galvanically isolated.
Usage of CT measuring via the IC-NT CT-BIO7 module:

- Earth Fault current protection
- Peak Load shaving function
3.19.5.1 Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module IC-NT-BIO7.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is
dispersed to earth, and when the set Earth Fault Del time elapses, the Earth Fault Sd protection and
AL EarthFault output are activated. Earth Fault protection is not active when gen-set does not run and
the Im/EF input parameter is not set to “EarthFltC”.
Earth Fault [A]
Earth Fault Sd
Time [s]
AL Earth Fault
1
Time [s]
Earth Fault Del
CAUTION!
Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the machines!
NT
3.20 Communication modules
A communication module enables connection of a remote computer or other remote device such as a
PLC to the controller. The module is to be plugged-in into the slot in the rear side of the controller. The
slot is accessible after the slot cover is removed.
More information about how to use communication modules can be found in the chapter
Communications.
SLOT FOR COMMUNICATION MODULES

NOTE:
The modules are compatible with the IL-NT controllers also.
3.20.1 IL-NT RS232

This module contains a RS232 port with all modem signals connected internally to the COM1 of the
controller. DB9M connector is used on the RS232 side.
SERIAL “CROSS-WIRED” CABLE
2 2
DB9M
DB9M
3 3
5 5
To controller To PC COM
RS232 port port
RS232 PINOUT AND CABLE WIRING
NT
3.20.2 IL-NT RS232-485
The IL-NT RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and RS485 interfaces at independent COM
channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
RS485
balancing
resistor
RS232
jumpers
COM1
Boot jumper
RS485 120R
terminator jumper
B (RxTx -)
RS485
GND
COM2
A (RxTx +)
+5V
RS485 internal
wiring
Balancing
resistor
A
Terminator
A
GND
GND
Balancing B
resistor
B
IL-NT RS232-485 MODULE
3.20.3 IL-NT S-USB

This module contains a USB slave port connected internally to the COM1 of the controller and is
designed as an easily removable service module.
This module requires a FTDI USB Serial converter driver installed in the PC. The driver creates a
virtual serial port (COM) in the PC, which must be used in LiteEdit as communication port when a
connection is being opened.
NOTE:
The FTDI driver is installed together with LiteEdit.
NOTE:
When the USB cable from the controller is plugged for the first time into different USB ports on the PC
including USB hubs, it may be recognized as new hardware and the drivers will be installed again with
a different number of the virtual serial port.
CAUTION!
Use a shielded USB cable only!
NT
3.20.4 IB-Lite
IB-Lite is a plug-in module with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. The module is
internally connected to both COM1 and COM2 serial channels and provides an interface for
connecting a PC with LiteEdit or InteliMonitor through an Ethernet/internet network, for sending active
e-mails and for integration of the controller into a building management (Modbus/TCP protocol).
RJ45
Ethernet
“Restore
default
settings”
jumper
IB-LITE MODULE
Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network.
The module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.
RJ45 RJ45
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
CROSS-WIRED UTP 10/100Mbit

CABLE
CROSS-WIRED UTP CABLE
NT
The communication module IB-Lite works with:
 WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
 AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
NOTE:
The module requires some setup before initial usage. See the chapter IB-Lite setup procedure.
3.20.5 IL-NT GPRS

This plug-in module is a GSM/GPRS modem which can work in two modes of operation based on the
settings in the setpoint COM1 Mode.
 Settings DIRECT = the module works in a GPRS network and enables connection via AirGate
to LiteEdit and WebSupervisor as well as sending SMS alarms.
 Settings MODEM = the module works as a standard GSM modem enabling a CSD (Circuit
Switch Data) connection to the controller with LiteEdit or InteliMonitor and sending SMS
alarms.
IL-NT GPRS MODULE AND GSM/GPRS SCREEN ON IC-NT DISPLAY

The communication module IL-NT GPRS works with:
 WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
 AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
 Locate – localization technology
NOTE:
GPRS and CSD services must be provided by your GSM/GPRS operator for successful operation.
NOTE:
THE GPRS AND CSD CONNECTION SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR THE FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCESS. USE
INSTEAD A WIRED CONNECTION LIKE RS232, USB, RS485 OR ETHERNET VIA IB-LITE!
NOTE:
It is necessary to power the controller and individually the IL-NT GPRS module as well.
WARNING
NT
Any manipulation of the IL-NT GPRS module should be done only without voltage.
3.20.5.1 SMS Commands

NT
To control the gen-set equipped with InteliCompact controller and IL-NT GPRS communication
module (or modem) via SMS requests, send an SMS in the structure of:
# xxxx, yyyy, zzzz, etc.
to the telephone number of the SIM card in your IL-NT-GPRS module (or modem). Where the “#” mark
means the controller access code, “xxxx” means the Command 1, “yyyy” is Command 2, “zzzz” is
Command 3, etc.
Table of SMS requests:

start Start the engine in MAN mode.
stop Stop the engine in MAN mode.
fault reset Acknowledging alarms and deactivating the horn output.
gcb close Closing GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
gcb open Opening GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
mcb close Closing MCB in MAN and TEST mode (only in IC-NT SPTM).
mcb open Opening MCB in MAN and TEST mode (only in IC-NT SPTM).
off Switching to OFF mode.
man Switching to MAN mode.
aut Switching to AUT mode.
test Switching to TEST mode.
status Get status information from controller unit.
help Get a list of available SMS requests.
Example:
When the controller, in AUT mode, with a controller name of “IC-NT-Test”, with the IL-NT
GPRS module and access code “0” receives the SMS:
0 man, start, d10, gcb close, d300, gcb open, d30, stop, d30, aut
the mode will be changed to MANUAL. The engine will be started and after 10 s the
controller will start the synchronization process and the GCB will close. After 300 s (from
the point of starting synchronization) the GCB will open (after the “GCB Opens Del”
setpoint), the engine will stop with a 30 s delay and it will go into AUT mode.
The controller will send back the SMS:
#IC-NT-Test:
man<OK>,start<OK>,d_ok,gcb_close<OK>,d_ok,
gcb_open<OK>,d_ok,stop<OK>,d_ok,aut<OK>
if all conditions are correct.

NOTE:
The value “OK” in an SMS means that the command was successfully transmitted to the controller.
Potential errors/alarms during execution of commands are shown in Event SMS if is set (as is
described below).
3.20.5.2 Event SMS

NT
The InteliCompact controller equipped with the IL-NT GPRS communication module is able to send
Event SMS according to the setting in the SMS/Email setpoint group:
NT
 Event Msg – enable/disable sending of event SMS
 Tel No/Addr Ch1 or Tel No/Addr Ch2 – field for administrator’s GSM phone number
The following events can be received by mobile phone:
- Engine Start/Stop
o Manual Start/Stop
o Remote Start/Stop
o Gen Peak Start/Stop
o PMS StartStop (as Power Management System Start/Stop)
o AMF Start/Stop (as Automatic Mains Failure Start/Stop)
o Test Start/Gen-set Stop
- Mains Fail
- Mains Returned
- Load on Mains
- Load on Genset
- Parallel Operation
- Test On Load
Message structure (e.g.):
Genset Name [hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy]
hh:mm:ss Mains Fail
hh:mm:ss AMF Start
hh:mm:ss Load on Genset
hh:mm:ss Mains Returned
hh:mm:ss Parallel Oper.
hh:mm:ss Load on Mains
hh:mm:ss AMF Stop
3.20.6 InternetBridge-NT
The InternetBridge-NT (IB-NT) is a communication module that allows connection of a single controller
as well as a whole site to the internet or a Local Area Network. The internet connection can be
enabled via the built-in cellular modem supporting 2G and 3G networks or via Ethernet cable.
NT
For InteliCompact the following functions are available:
- Direct Ethernet connection to ComAp configuration and monitoring tools (LiteEdit, InteliMonitor
or WebSupervisor)
- AirGate support
- Web interface
NOTE:
NT
Support of InteliCompact controllers is in IB-NT 1.2 SW and newer.
For further information and options that can be set, see IB-NT Reference Guide.
NT
3.21 EFI engines
To meet requests for low fuel consumption, low emissions and high reliability, modern engines are
electronically controlled by an "Engine Control Unit" (ECU). The ECU is fitted directly on the engine; it
measures various engine parameters like speed, intake air flow, coolant temperature, etc. and controls
various actuators like injectors, ignition, valves, etc. to achieve optimal operating conditions of the
engine.
Most of the ECUs also have a communication interface to the rest of the system (e.g. a vehicle, a gen-
set, a pump, etc.) to provide engine operational data, alarm conditions and also to enable remote
control. The most commonly used interface is the CAN bus with the SAE J1939 protocol or sometimes
also the RS485 with the MODBUS protocol.
The J1939 protocol was introduced by the SAE organization originally for the automotive industry but
now is often used also for other engine applications. The J1939 specification is partially open, which
means that each engine producer may have a slightly different implementation of the J1939 protocol.
This is why each new ECU type obviously needs slight modification of the controller firmware to
support the particular ECU.
The IC-NT controller supports most of the J1939-based ECU types as well as Cummins Modbus ECU.
New ECU types are added to the firmware as they appear in the field.
3.21.1 Differences between a classic and EFI-engine application

The main difference is less wiring, sensors and actuators in an EFI-engine application compared to a
classic one. The typical wiring of an EFI-engine application shows that there are no analog sensors,
no pickup and no governor. All this information is being communicated between the controller and the
ECU via the communication bus.
3.21.1.1 Data received from the ECU (if available in the particular ECU)
OBJECT TYPE ALARM COMMENTS
Engine speed Analog Shutdown (Over speed)
Oil pressure Analog Configurable
Coolant temperature Analog Configurable
Oil temperature Analog None
Boost pressure Analog None
Intake temperature Analog None
Percentage of load at current speed Analog None
Fuel rate Analog None
Fuel level Analog Configurable
Engine hours Analog None
Yellow lamp Binary Warning
Red lamp Binary Shutdown
Engine hours Analog None
NT
NOTE:
The ECU values Oil pressure, Coolant temperature and Fuel level can be configured as source values
for the controller analog inputs 1, 2, 3 instead of physical terminals. In that case, all analog input-
related things like protections, switches, etc. work the same way as if physical terminals are used.
In case there is valid value of Running Hours (Engine Hours) coming from ECU, controller will prefer
that value instead of internal calculation
3.21.1.2 Data sent to the ECU (if supported by the particular ECU)
OBJECT TYPE COMMENTS
Speed request (governor output) Analog
Start request Binary
Stop request Binary
Idle/Nominal switch Binary
Shutdown override Binary
Frequency selection switch Binary 50/60Hz selection
3.21.1.3 ECU alarms

Alarms (diagnostic messages) are read from the ECU and displayed in the ECU Alarmlist
3.21.1.4 Supported ECU types

SUPPORTED ECU (ENGINE) TYPES AND THEIR REMOTE CONTROL CAPABILITIES
ECU TYPE REMOTE START REMOTE STOP REMOTE SPEED CONTROL

*
Standard J1939 Engine No No Yes
Scania S6 Singlespeed Yes Yes Yes
Scania S8 Singlespeed Yes Yes Yes
Volvo EMSI Singlespeed / EMSII Yes Yes Yes

*
Deutz EMR2 No Yes Yes
*
Deutz EMR3 Yes Yes Yes
Deutz EMR4 No Yes Yes

*
Cummins CM570 Yes Yes Yes
Cummins CM850/CM2150/CM2250 No No No
Cummins MODBUS - - -
*
MTU ADEC Yes Yes Yes
MTU SMART Connect Yes Yes Yes
Waukesha ESM No No No
NT
*
Iveco ADEMIII (Vector) Yes Yes Yes
*
Iveco EDC (Cursor) No No Yes
*
John Deere No No Yes
*
Perkins ECM No No Yes
Perkins 1300 No Yes No

*
SISU EEM3 Genset No No Yes
*
Caterpillar J1939 No No Yes
*
DDC DDEC IV/V No No Yes
*
VM Industrial No No Yes
VM Marine No Yes Yes
MAN MFR Yes Yes Yes
SISU EEM3 Yes Yes No

*
GM MEFI6 No No Yes
*
GM SECM No No Yes
GM e-control No No Yes
GM e-control LCI No No Yes
ISUZU ECM Yes Yes Yes
DaimlerChrysler ADM2 Yes Yes Yes
JCB Delphi No No Yes
* standard TSC1 frame
NOTE:
NT
Support for electronics engines was unified with the InteliLite Comap controller family. Please use
NT
the ECU List version 5.9 or higher for proper function with the InteliCompact 2.0 firmware. ECU List
5.9 is part of the IC-NT 2.0 Installation Suite.
Support of new ECU types is continuously added to the new firmware releases. If you cannot find your
ECU type in the list, please download the latest release of the document ComAp Electronic Engines
Support from http://www.comap.cz or contact technical support for more information.
NT
68
AVRi-TRANS
AC
230V
LOAD
IG-AVRi
ENGINE
MAINS INLET
GENERATOR
GCB MCB
CAN SAE J1939 ECU
AVR
STARTER
KEY SWITCH (15)
InteliCompact-NT-2.1-Reference Guide.pdf, ©ComAp – May 2015

REM START/STOP
-
EMERGENCY STOP
+
ACCESS LOCK
TYPICAL WIRING OF AN EFI ENGINE IN SPTM APPLICATION

WARNING ALARM
COM
BI9
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI8
BI7
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
EL. TRIP ALARM
N
3.22 Typical wiring – EFI engine
Generator voltage Mains voltage Binary inputs

SHUTDOWN ALARM
D+ (L) Generator current
SHUTDOWN ALARM
SPtM
+B
IC-NT
Communication module
Extension module
W
-B
CAN1 FULL
Ext. modules
Governor Analog LOAD
AVRi inputs Pickup Power

Binary outputs
RPM GND
AO GND
AI COM
AVR+
COM
RPM
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
SG+
AI1
AI2
AI3
D+
H
+
L
-
ALARM
NT
SUPPRESION DIODES ARE NOT INDICATED, BUT REQUIRED!
69
AVRi-TRANS
AC
230V
LOAD
IG-AVRi
ENGINE
MAINS INLET
GENERATOR
GCB MCB
GOVERNOR
AVR
STARTER
FUEL SOLENOID
GLOW PLUGS
THIS WIRING CORRESPONDS TO FACTORY DEFAULT SPTM CONFIGURATION

REM START/STOP
-
EMERGENCY STOP
FUEL LEVEL
OIL PRESSURE
ANALOG INPUTS GND
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
3.23 Typical wiring – classic engine
ACCESS LOCK
+
WARNING ALARM
COM
BI9
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI8
BI7
EL. TRIP ALARM
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
N
N
SHUTDOWN ALARM
Generator current
D+ (L) SHUTDOWN ALARM
SPtM
IC-NT
+B
Extension module
W
-B
CAN1 FULL
Ext. modules
Governor Analog LOAD

Binary outputs
RPM GND
AO GND
AI COM
AVR+
COM
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
RPM
SG+
AI1
AI2
AI3
D+
+
H
-
L
SPEED
PICKUP
ALARM
NT
70
AVRi-TRANS
AC
230V
IG-AVRi
ENGINE COMMON
GENERATOR BUSBAR
GCB
GOVERNOR
AVR
STARTER
FUEL SOLENOID
GLOW PLUGS
THIS WIRING CORRESPONDS TO FACTORY DEFAULT MINT CONFIGURATION

-
EMERGENCY STOP
FUEL LEVEL
OIL PRESSURE
ANALOG INPUTS GND
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ACCESS LOCK
+
PRIORITY 0
COM
BI9
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI8
BI7
MIN RUN POWER
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
N
N
WARNING ALARM
Generator current
D+ (L) SHUTDOWN ALARM
MINT
IC-NT
+B
Extension module
W
-B
CAN1 SYST RES
Ext. modules
Governor Analog OK
CAN2
Network Binary outputs
RPM GND
AO GND
AI COM
AVR+
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
COM
COM
RPM
SG+
AI1
D+
AI2
AI3
-
H
H
L
L

SPEED
PICKUP
ALARM
NT
NETWORK CAN
TO OTHER CONTROLLERS
MCB FEEDBACK
SYS START/STOP
NETWORK CAN
TO OTHER CONTROLLERS
3.24 Emergency Stop
The Emergency Stop function can be made in two ways:
 Connecting a normally closed “mushroom-type” button to the binary input Emergency Stop.
This is a purely software solution.
 A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller
outputs.
- BATT
+ BATT
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT
OUTPUTS
SUPPRESION DIODES ARE NOT INDICATED, BUT

REQUIRED!
HARD-WIRED EMERGENCY STOP
NT
4 Putting it into operation
4.1 Programming the configuration

The controller is delivered with a default configuration that should fit most standard applications.
Nevertheless you may need to modify it because your application is different. Please refer to the
LiteEdit manual or help file for information on using LiteEdit for changing the particular items of the
configuration and writing the configuration to the controller.
CONFIGURATION WINDOW IN LITEEDIT
4.2 Programming the firmware

Although the controller is delivered with the latest firmware available at the moment of production, it
may be necessary to upgrade the firmware in future. The process of programming the firmware
involves the following steps:
1. First you need the requested firmware. Firmware of standard branch and major versions are
distributed and installed together with the LiteEdit installation package. Release versions and
branches are distributed as import packages that need to be imported into LiteEdit.
2. The latest installation and/or import packages are available for download at www.comap.cz.
Please register to get access to the download page. Registration is free.
3. The import package is a file with the IWE extension. To perform the import, start LiteEdit, do
not open any connections, go to Options -> Import firmware and select the appropriate file.
4. Create an online connection to the controller and save the archive for backup purposes.
NOTE:
It is not possible to update firmware when the connection is offline!
5. Go to the menu Controller -> Programming and cloning -> Programming, select the
appropriate firmware and press the OK button.
6. The selected firmware will be programmed into your controller.
NT
NOTE:
It is possible to program only firmware compatible with the currently attached controller. Other
firmware is disabled and cannot be selected for programming.
CAUTION!
The configuration reverts to the default after firmware has been programmed. You must re-program
the configuration if the default one is not appropriate for your application!
CAUTION!
Also some setpoints may have incorrect values after new firmware was programmed. Please check all
setpoints after programming.
4.3 Programming a non-responsive controller

If the controller does not contain valid firmware, new firmware cannot be programmed in the standard
way. This situation can occur if the connection between the PC and the controller was interrupted e.g.
during a previous firmware upgrade. In such a case the controller has a blank display and does not
communicate with the PC. The boot-jumper must be used to get valid firmware into the controller.
1. Disconnect the power supply from the controller, insert a communication module and close the
boot-jumper.
BOOT-JUMPER ON IL-NT RS232

NOTE:
See the communication modules chapter for information about boot-jumper position on other
modules.
2. Connect the proper communication cable between the controller and PC.
3. Start LiteEdit and open an online connection according to the module used. Select controller
address 1. Wait until the bottom line of LiteEdit shows a red line with the text "DDE server:
Error".
4. Go to the menu Controller -> Programming and cloning -> Programming, select the
appropriate firmware and press the OK button.
5. Follow the instructions in the message that appears and finally press the OK button.
6. Another message will appear when programming is finished. Follow the instructions given
there.
NT
4.5 Factory default configuration
4.5.1 SPtM
SPtM only
BINARY INPUTS
NO. DESCRIPTION CONFIGURED FUNCTION
BI1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB Feedback

BI2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB Feedback
BI3 Remote start/stop Rem Start/Stop
BI4 Emergency stop button Emergency Stop
BI5 Access lock keyswitch Access Lock
BI6 Warning alarm None
BI7 Electrical trip alarm (BOC) None
BI8 Shutdown alarm None
BINARY OUTPUTS
NO. CONFIGURED FUNCTION
BO1 Starter
BO2 Fuel Solenoid
BO3 GCB Close/Open
BO4 MCB Close/Open
BO5 Prestart
BO6 Alarm
BO7 Horn
BO8 None
ANALOG INPUTS
NO. INPUT NAME CONFIGURED SENSOR
AI1 Oil pressure Sensor VDO 10 Bar, warning + shutdown alarm

AI2 Water temperature Sensor VDO 120 deg, warning + shutdown alarm
AI3 Fuel level Sensor VDO 180 Ohm, warning alarm
NOTE:
A wiring diagram that corresponds to the factory default SPtM configuration is available in a separate
chapter in the “Installation” section of this manual.
NT
4.5.2 MINT
MINT only
BINARY INPUTS
NO. DESCRIPTION CONFIGURED FUNCTION
BI1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB Feedback

BI2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB Feedback
BI3 System start/stop Sys Start/Stop
BI4 Emergency stop button Emergency Stop
BI5 Access lock keyswitch Access Lock
BI6 Highest priority switch Top Priority
BI7 Large load preparation switch Min Run Power
BI8 Warning alarm None
BINARY OUTPUTS
NO. CONFIGURED FUNCTION
BO1 Starter
BO2 Fuel Solenoid
BO3 GCB Close/Open
BO4
BO5 Prestart
BO6 Alarm
BO7 Horn
BO8 SystReserve OK
ANALOG INPUTS
NO. INPUT NAME CONFIGURED SENSOR
AI1 Oil pressure Sensor VDO 10 Bar, warning + shutdown alarm

AI2 Water temperature Sensor VDO 120 deg, warning + shutdown alarm
AI3 Fuel level Sensor VDO 180 Ohm, warning alarm
NT
4.6 Step-by-step guide
In the following you will find several steps which you should carry out when you are putting a gen-set
into operation. It supposes that the switchboard wiring has been already checked.
NOTE:
This guide is not a handbook for a beginner, but it is focused on things specific for ComAp controllers
and expects sufficient knowledge and skills in the field of generating sets!
WARNING!
Some parts of the generator, engine and switchboard may carry dangerous voltage which can cause
injury or death when touched!
WARNING!
Rotating parts of the gen-set can catch hair or clothing and cause serious injury.
1. Disconnect the binary outputs from the controller before connecting the power supply. If you
have an SPtM application, be sure that the MCB and GCB are protected against accidental
switching when you are working in the switchboard.
2. Check the controller configuration according to the wiring diagram of the switchboard. If the
configuration has been modified, write it to the controller
3. Write all setpoints from the default archive and then go through them and readjust all of them
if it is necessary. Pay special attention to nominal values, overspeed, gear teeth, fuel solenoid
and CT ratio.
4. Check all settings regarding speed sensing and additional running information, especially if
you do not use a pickup for speed sensing.
5. Adjust bias setpoints for the governor and AVRi output to the recommended levels and adjust
all delays for generator protections to high values to have enough time for making adjustments
on a running gen-set.
6. Connect the binary outputs back.
7. Adjust all setpoints related to engine start and stabilization phase, then start the gen-set in
MAN mode and then make fine readjustments.
8. Leave the gen-set running and adjust the governor and/or AVRi so that the gen-set will have a
speed and voltage near to the nominal values. If it is not possible to achieve this by turning the
trim on the AVRi and/or governor, you can also slightly change the bias setpoints.
NOTE:
The bias setpoints must not be near the limits for the particular output, because the regulation
loops need sufficient reserve of the output range on both sides to work correctly.
9. Adjust all generator and engine protections according to your needs including the delays.
10. Adjust the setpoint Phase Window to 0. This adjustment will disable issuing of the GCB close
command during synchronization, but the synchronization itself will be performed normally for
the whole adjusted time.
11. Press the GCB button to start the synchronizing. Then, using a voltmeter connected directly
over the contactor, check if the synchroscope indication on the controller screen matches the
voltage. The voltage must be near to 0V when the synchroscope is in a 12 o'clock position
and near to 2*Unominal when it is in a 6 o'clock position. Check all three phases.
NT
The voltmeter must show
minimum voltage in all phases
when the synchroscope is in 12
o’clock position
GCB MIN MAX
OPEN V
O I
The voltmeter must show

maximum voltage in all phases
when the synchroscope is in 6
o’clock position
GCB MIN MAX
OPEN V
O I
12. Adjust the setpoint Phase Window back to your desired value (typically 3–7°).
13. Synchronize the gen-set with the mains or other gen-sets. Adjust the setpoints for voltage,
frequency and angle regulation loops to achieve fast and reliable synchronization.
14. Adjust the setpoints for power, power factor, load-sharing and VARsharing loops.
15. Check the rest of the setpoints and then save the archive to disk for backup purposes.
NT
5 Operator guide
5.1 Front panel elements
16 5 6
10
11
18 19 20 17 15 14 8 13 12 7
GEN-SET CONTROL BUTTONS
POSITION DESCRIPTION
START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the start
1 sequence of the engine. See the Engine start chapter in the Reference Guide
to learn more about the start sequence.
STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the gen-set. Repeatedly pressing or holding the button for more
than twice will cancel the current phase of stop sequence (like ramping the
2
power down or cooling) and the next phase will continue. See the Engine cool
down and stop chapter in the Reference Guide to learn more about the stop
sequence.
FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and
deactivate the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and
3 status of active alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear
as soon as their causes are dismissed. Learn more about alarms in the Alarm
management chapter in the Reference Guide.
HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
4
acknowledging the alarms.
NT
MODE LEFT button. Use this button to change the mode. The button works
only if the main screen with the indicator of the currently selected mode is
displayed.
5 NOTE:
This button will not work if the controller mode is forced by one of the binary
inputs listed in the Reference Guide in the Operating modes chapter.
MODE RIGHT button. Use this button to change the mode. The button works
only if the main screen with the indicator of the currently selected mode is
displayed.
6
NOTE:
This button will not work if the controller mode is forced by one of the binary
inputs listed in the Reference Guide in the Operating modes chapter.
GCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open
or close the GCB or start synchronizing manually. Note that certain conditions
7 must be fulfilled otherwise GCB closing (starting of synchronization) is
blocked. See the Connecting to the load chapter in the Reference Guide for
details.
MCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open
or close the MCB or start the reverse synchronizing manually.
8 CAUTION!
You can disconnect the load from the mains supply with this button! Be sure
you are well aware of what you are about to do!
GEN-SET OPERATION INDICATORS
General alarm. This red indicator lights up if at least one alarm is present in the alarm
9
list. It blinks if a new alarm has appeared and is still not acknowledged.
Gen-set voltage OK. This green indicator lights up if the generator voltage and
frequency is within the limits.
10 NOTE:
The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Gener
Protect group.
GCB position. This green indicator blinks if the forward synchronizing is currently in
11 progress; otherwise it shows the current status of the generator circuit breaker
according to the feedback input.
12 Bus under voltage. This green indicator shows if the bus is under voltage or not.
MCB position. This green indicator blinks if the reverse synchronizing is currently in
13 progress; otherwise it shows the current status of the mains circuit breaker according to
the feedback input.
Mains voltage OK. This green indicator lights up if the mains are evaluated as healthy.
14 See the AMF function chapter in the Reference Guide for details about mains
evaluation.
Mains failure. This red indicator starts blinking when mains failure is detected. After
15 the gen-set has started and is about to take the load, it lights up permanently until the
mains failure disappears.
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY CONTROL BUTTONS
NT
16 Graphic B/W display, 128x64 pixels
PAGE button. Use this button to switch across display pages. See the next
17
chapter for details about display pages and screens structure
18 UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.
19 DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.
ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or move right in the
20
history page.
5.2 User interface modes

The user interface consists of two modes:
 User mode allows the user to go through all screens with measurements and alarms. The
button does not work, i.e. setpoints and history pages are not accessible.
 Engineer mode gives qualified personnel full access to all pages and screens.
See the chapter User interface mode selection to learn how to change the user interface mode.
5.3 Display screens and pages structure
The displayed information is structured into “pages” and “screens”. Use the button to switch
over the pages.
1. The Measurement page consists of screens which display measured values like voltages,
current, oil pressure, etc. and computed values such as gen-set power, statistic data and the
alarm list on the last screen.
2. The Setpoints page contains all setpoints organized into groups and also a special group for
entering the password.
3. The History log page shows the history log in order with the last record displayed first.
NOTE:
The picture below shows the structure of displayed data. The contents of each particular screen may
be slightly different according to the firmware branch and version.
NT
ENGINEER MODE ONLY
MEASUREMENT
SETPOINTS
P O
HISTORY LOG
Time Date
16:00:00 16/11/2011
>15:00:00 16/11/2011
14:35:00 16/11/2011
19:20:00 14/11/2011
-1 Time Stamp
STRUCTURE OF THE DISPLAYED DATA
NT
5.4 View measured values
Press the button repeatedly until you see the main screen with the kW meter and mode
selector. Then press or to select the requested screen within the measurement page.
MODE SELECTOR
BREAKERS STATUS
ENGINE STATUS
POWER FACTOR
ENGINE SPEED
CURRENT PROCESS
TIMER
ACTIVE POWER
THE MAIN SCREEN
5.5 Setpoints – view and change
1. Press the button repeatedly until you see a screen with a list of setpoint groups. Then
select the desired group by pressing the or buttons and finally press the
button to continue to the selected group.

2. Now you will see the list of setpoints which belong to the selected group together with their
current setting. Use the or buttons again to select the setpoint you want to
modify and press .

3. The current value of the setpoint will appear in the right part under the setpoint name and you
can change it by pressing the or buttons. The rate of changing the value will
accelerate when the button is held down.
4. Press the button to confirm the change or to discard it and return to the list of
setpoints of the selected group.
5. Continue by changing another setpoint or press to return to the list of groups.
NT
LIST OF GROUPS OF SETPOINTS
LIST OF SETPOINTS WITHIN SELECTED GROUP
EDITING A SETPOINT
5.6 Browsing the history log
1. Press the button repeatedly until you see the main history log screen with the reason
column and the latest record.
NOTE:
The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is “0” and older
records have "-1", "-2", etc.
2. Use the button to move over columns within the selected record. Pressing it repeatedly
will move cyclically through the columns, i.e. after the last column the first one will be
displayed.
3. Use the buttons and to move over the records.
4. Press the button to select another display page.
NT
MAIN HISTORY LOG SCREEN
NOTE:
The first history record after the controller is switched on, programmed or watchdog reset occurs
contains diagnostic values instead of operational values. Some fields in these records may have
nonsense values. Do not take these values into account.
5.7 Browsing alarms

The Alarmlist and ECU Alarmlist are displayed on the last two screens in the measurement page. If
the main screen is displayed, then the Alarmlist screen will appear automatically whenever a new
alarm occurs. It can be also displayed manually as described in the chapter View measured values.
 Use the button to move over the alarms in the ECU Alarmlist. Details of the selected
alarm are displayed in the bottom line.
 Press the button to reset alarms.
 Active alarms are displayed as white text on a black background. This means the alarm is
still active, i.e. the appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
 Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on a white background. This means the alarm is
no longer active, i.e. the appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
 Unconfirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. This means the alarm is still not
acknowledged (confirmed).
Number of
Active confirmed alarm
alarms
Active uncorfirmed alarm
Inactive unconfirmed alarm
ALARMLIST
Active but confirmed alarm Ecu AlarmList

Selected alarm indicator EngOil Press
>EngOil
Active confirmed alarm,
000225 (00E1h)
DTC numeric form *000600 (00258h)
Inactive unconfirmed alarm, ________________________
DTC numeric form FC 100 OC 1 FMI 1
Selected alarm details
ECU ALARMLIST
NT
NOTE:
The ECU AlarmList is visible only if an ECU is configured.
5.8 Entering the password

A password must be entered prior to adjusting setpoints that are password-protected. The password is
located in the first group of setpoints and the method to enter or change the password is similar to
changing setpoints as described in the setpoints chapter.
NOTE:
It is possible to change only passwords of the same or lower level than the currently entered
password!
NOTE:
Lost password? Display the information screen which contains the serial number and a password
decode number as described in the chapter below. Write down both numbers and send a request to
retrieve the password to your local distributor containing these two numbers. You can also save and
send an archive instead.
5.9 Controller information screen
1. Press the button repeatedly until you will see the main controller screen with the mode
selector and kW analog meter.
2. Hold down the button and simultaneously press the button to see the controller
information screen.
3. The information screen will disappear automatically after 5 seconds.
4. Press the button again within 5 to switch to the language selection screen.
5. Press the button again to switch to the user interface mode selection screen. This
screen also contains the serial number and password decode number.
6. Pressing the button next switches back to the information screen.
7. Press the button to get back to the controller main screen.
NT
1)
2)
1) Init Sreen is enabled
2) Init Screen is disabled
The information screen contains the following information:
 Controller Name
 Firmware identification string
 Serial number of the controller
 Firmware version, application version
 Application type
 Branch name
NT
5.10 Controller language selection
There are two languages available in the controller. The default languages are English and Chinese.
The languages can be changed or modified during configuration in LiteEdit. See the LiteEdit
documentation for details.
To switch the controller language:
1. Display the information screen as described above.
2. While the information screen is still displayed, press the button.
3. The Language menu will appear, use the or buttons to select the desired
language.
4. Press to confirm the selection.
5.11 User interface mode selection

To switch the User interface mode, follow these instructions:
1. Display the information screen as described above.
2. While the information screen is still displayed, press the button twice.
3. The user interface mode menu will appear, use the or buttons to select the
desired mode.
4. Press to confirm the selection.
5.12 Display contrast adjustment
1. Press the button repeatedly until you see the main controller screen with the mode
selector and kW analog meter.
2. Hold down the button and simultaneously press or repeatedly to increase

or decrease the contrast.
NT
6 Function description
This chapter describes the most frequent situations in the gen-set control. Non-standard situations and
combinations with a low probability of occurrence are not described.
6.1 Island operation flowchart
Gen-set ready
Start command: either pressing

START button in MAN mode or
automatic start in AUT or TEST
mode
Start not successful

Start sequence StartFail alarm
Voltage and frequency

stabilization not successful
Stabilization
Gen. U/f alarm
sequence
Continues automatically in AUT

mode or by pressing GCB
button in MAN mode
Connecting to the
load
(closing GCB)
Island operation (no

regulation is
performed)
Stop command: either
pressing STOP button in
MAN mode, or automatic
stop in AUT mode
GCB open command:
Disconnecting load pressing GCB button in MAN
(opening GCB) mode
stop sequence
Stop command?
No
Yes Gen-set not

Stop not successful ready
Cooling and stop Fault reset

StopFail alarm
sequence
Stop sequence
continues
NT
6.2 Parallel operation flowchart
Gen-set ready
Start command: either pressing

START button in MAN mode or
automatic start in AUT or TEST
mode
Start not successful

Start sequence StartFail alarm
Voltage and frequency

stabilization not successful
Stabilization
Gen. U/f alarm
sequence
Continues automatically in AUT
mode or by pressing GCB
button in MAN mode
SynchroTimeout
Synchronization
alarm
Synchronization not
successful
Connecting to the
load
(closing the GCB)
Soft loading
GCB open command:
pressing GCB button in
Parallel operation MAN mode
(kW/PF regulation
or kW/kVAr sharing)
Stop command:
either pressing
STOP button in MAN stop sequence
Soft unloading mode, or automatic
stop in AUT mode
Disconnecting load
(opening GCB) Gen-set not
ready
Fault reset
No Stop command?
Yes
Cooling and stop

StopFail alarm
sequence
Stop sequence
Stop not successful
continues
NT
6.3 Operating modes
Selecting the operating mode is done through MODE buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller mode setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
NOTE:
If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.
NOTE:
The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.
The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the
mode setpoint selection:
 Remote OFF
 Remote MAN
 Remote AUT
 Remote TEST
 Rem TEST OnLd
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according
to the active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the
inputs. The priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return
to the original position given by the setpoint.
6.3.1 OFF
The GCB will be opened and the engine will be immediately stopped in this mode without unloading
and cooling. After that the controller will stay in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On = GENRUN) or is open or closed according to whether
the mains are present or not (MCB Opens On = MAINSFAIL). No AMF function will be performed. The
buttons MCB, GCB, START, STOP including the appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not
active.
6.3.2 MAN
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the START and STOP buttons (or external
buttons wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can
be closed to a dead bus or synchronizing can be started by the GCB button. Also MCB can be closed
and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the mains are present or not. No
auto start is performed. No reaction to the inputs Sys Start/Stop or Rem Start/Stop.
A loaded engine in MAN mode will perform Load sharing and VAR sharing, but will not take place
within the power management.
NOTE:
The breakers are internally locked to close two voltages against each other without synchronizing! The
controller will automatically recognize if the breaker can be just closed or must be synchronized.
CAUTION!
The MCB can be opened manually in MAN mode. Accidental opening of the MCB will cause the object
(load) to remain without power!!!
NT
6.3.3 AUT
The engine is started and stopped by the binary input Rem Start/Stop (SPtM), by the Load demand
auto start function (SPtM) or by the Power management (MINT). The buttons MCB, GCB, START,
STOP including the appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not active. The full start
sequence up to the moment when the engine is loaded is automatic as well as unloading and the stop
sequence.
WARNING!
If a red alarm is present and the gen-set is in AUT mode, it can start by itself after all red alarms
become inactive and are acknowledged!!! To avoid this situation, adjust the setpoint Reset to MAN to
the ENABLED position.
6.3.4 TEST
SPtM only
The behaviour of the controller in TEST mode depends mainly on the setting of the ReturnFromTEST
setpoint.
6.3.4.1 Automatic return

Setpoint ReturnFromTEST = ENABLED.
The gen-set will be started when the controller is put into TEST mode and will remain running
unloaded. If a mains failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Transfer Del the GCB will be
closed and the gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay
MainsReturnDel will count down and if it elapses and the mains are still ok, the controller will
synchronize back to the mains, transfer the load back to the mains (the maximum time that both
breakers are closed is determined by the BreakerOverlap setpoint) and the gen-set will remain
running unloaded again until the mode is changed.
6.3.4.2 Manual return

Setpoint ReturnFromTEST = DISABLED.
The gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded.
If a mains failure occurs, the gen-set will take the load after it has started.
The load can be transferred to the gen-set also manually:
 If the GCB button is pressed, the controller will synchronize to the mains, transfer the load to
the gen-set (the maximum time that both breakers are closed is determined by the
BreakerOverlap setpoint) and then open the MCB.
 If the MCB button is pressed, the controller will open the MCB, then wait for Transfer Del and
finally close the GCB.
When the load is supplied by the gen-set and the mains are healthy, pressing the MCB button will start
reverse synchronizing and transfer the load back to the mains.
The gen-set remains running until the mode is changed.
6.3.4.3 Test with load

If the binary input Rem TEST OnLd is activated, the controller is switched to the TEST mode (i.e. the
gen-set will be started as described above), but once started the controller will automatically either
 synchronize to the mains (setpoint Synchro Enable = BOTH or FORWARD, binary input
ForwSyncDisabl is not active), transfer the load to the gen-set and then open the MCB. If the
mains Import/Export is measured (setpoint Im/EF input = Mains) then there is a time limitation
(setpoint Load Ramp) for unloading and opening of the MCB. The MCB opens when the
Import/Export goes below 0 ± 5% of the Nominal Power. If the Load Ramp time elapsed and
NT
Import/Export doesn't go below 0 ± 5% the alarm WrnTstOnLdFail becomes active and it's
recorded in the history. If the setpoint Im/EF input = EarthFltC then the MCB is opened after
delay given by setpoint BreakerOverlap.
Or
 will make a switchover (setpoint Synchro Enable = NONE or REVERSE), i.e. open the MCB,
wait for Transfer Del and close the GCB.
After the binary input Rem TEST OnLd has been deactivated, the controller goes back to the previous
operation mode (synchronize or switchover with regard to the setpoint Synchro Enable). In most cases
it will be AUT mode and the controller will either stay supplying the load if the mains have failed, or will
transfer the load back to the mains.
NOTE:
During the BreakerOverlap time, when both breakers are closed, the load is controlled either to zero
Import/Export level (if the MCB has to be opened) or to zero level (if the GCB has to be opened).
6.3.4.4 Periodic exercises

The output from the Exercise timer 1 is internally connected to the Remote TEST binary input to
enable periodic testing of the gen-set.
The controller must have AUT mode selected by the mode buttons and the other “mode forcing” binary
inputs must not be active to ensure proper function of the exercise.
NOTE:
If a shutdown or other red alarm occurs while the load is supplied from the gen-set and the mains are
healthy, the load is switched back to the mains.
6.4 Engine start
6.4.1 Diesel engine

The setpoint Fuel Solenoid must be switched to the DIESEL position.
1. After the command for start is issued (pressing START button in MAN mode, auto start
condition is fulfilled in AUT mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), the output Prestart
is energized for time period given by the setpoint Prestart Time.
2. After the prestart has elapsed, the output Fuel Solenoid is energized and 0.5 after that the
starter motor is activated by energizing the output Starter.
3. When one or more of following conditions are met, the prestart and starter of both outputs are
de-energized:
 The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM, or
 One of additional running indication signals becomes active.
4. The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of
Starting RPM, after that it is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
5. The maximum duration that the starter motor is energized is determined by the setpoint
MaxCrank time. If the engine does not start within this period, the starter motor is de-
energized and a pause with length determined by CrnkFail pause will follow. Prestart output
remains active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is
executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Crank Attempts.
6. Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output Idle/Nominal remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle
Time.
7. After the idle period has finished, the output Idle/Nominal is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The stabilization phase follows.
NT
Fuel solenoid = DIESEL
Fuel solenoid
activated
500ms
delay
Starter activated
Yes
Starting RPM Starter
reached? deactivated
No
Engine is started
Yes
Starter Another “engine

deactivated running” symptom Poil > Starting Poil or
present? Ugen > 25 Unom in at least one
phase or
No D+ input activated
No
MaxCrank time
elapsed?
Yes
Yes
Last attempt? Start fail alarm
No
Start pause
Yes
Starting RPM
Engine is started
reached?
No
Yes
MaxCrank time Fuel solenoid
RPM Meas Fail alarm
elapsed? deactivated
NT
6.4.2 Gas engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid must be switched to the GAS position.
1. After the command for start is issued (pressing START button in MAN mode, auto start
condition is fulfilled in AUT mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), the output Prestart
is energized for time period given by the setpoint Prestart Time.
2. After the prestart has elapsed, the starter motor is activated by energizing the output Starter.
3. When the engine speed exceeds 30RPM, the outputs Fuel Solenoid and Ignition are
energized.
4. When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM, the starter motor is de-energized, the
engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
CAUTION!
Additional running indication signals are not evaluated during the start of a gas engine. The
Pickup must be used in any case!
5. The maximum duration the starter motor is energized is determined by the setpoint MaxCrank
Time. If the engine does not start within this period, the starter motor and fuel solenoid are de-
energized and a pause with a length determined by CrnkFail Pause will follow. Prestart output
and ignition remain active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start
attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Crank Attempts.
6. Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output Idle/Nominal remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle
Time.
7. After the idle period has finished, the output Idle/Nominal is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The stabilization phase follows.
NT
Fuel solenoid = GAS
Starter activated
Fuel solenoid
30 RPM reached? and Ignition
activated
Yes
Starting RPM Starter
Engine is started
reached? deactivated
No
MaxCrank time
elapsed?
No
Yes
Starter, Fuel
solenoid, Ingition
deactivated
Yes
Last attempt? Start fail alarm
Start pause
NT
NOTE:
The starting sequence will be interrupted at any time if a stop command comes.
NOTE:
The Underspeed protection starts to be evaluated 5 after the engine has been started (according to
point 4).
NOTE:
When the engine is started (according to point 4) the delay given by the setpoint ProtectHoldOff will
count down. After it has elapsed, the protections configured as engine running only will start to be
evaluated.
Continue to the stabilization phase.
6.5 Stabilization
When the start-up sequence is finished, the gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are two
timers (setpoints) in this phase:
1. Min Stab Time starts to count down just after the idle period has finished. Generator voltage
and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
2. Max Stab Time starts to count down just after the idle period has finished. Generator voltage
and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to the
previous timer, the GCB can be closed (or synchronizing started) if generator voltage and
frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUT, TEST modes), the closing of GCB or
starting of synchronization will occur in the first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will
get into limits and the Min Stab Time has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Max Stab Time
period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
NOTE:
The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Gener protect group.
NOTE:
The value of the Min Stab Time setpoint must be lower than the value of Max Stab Time setpoint.
Continue to the connecting to the load phase.
6.6 Connecting to the load

When the stabilization phase is finished, the gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUT, TEST
modes) or manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
 The gen-set is running and the Min Stab Time timer has elapsed.
 The gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
NT
NOTE:
The governor and AVR must be adjusted properly to achieve these limits as the controller does not
perform any regulation and the regulation outputs have constant values given by the AVRi Bias and
Speed Gov Bias setpoints.
There are two ways to connect the gen-set to the load (bus bar). This depends on the state of MCB
feedback and on the measured mains/bus voltage.
6.6.1 Connecting to dead bus

SPtM: if the MCB is open, the bus bar is considered as voltage-free and the GCB is closed without
synchronizing.
MINT: the measured bus voltage is also taken in account and it must be below 2% of the nominal bus
voltage together with the open MCB to close the GCB without synchronizing.
NOTE:
If the group of gen-sets is activated and multiple gen-sets have to start simultaneously and connect to
the empty bus bar, there is an internal logic to prevent closing of more GCBs to the bus bar at the
same moment without synchronizing. One of the gen-sets will close the GCB, the others will wait and
then they will synchronize to the first one.
NOTE:
There also is a protection of “Bus power loss sensing”. The “Bus Measure Error” is detected in MINT
application when the voltage on the controller’s bus terminals is out of limits 20 seconds after:
a) GCB (own) was closed in MAN or AUT mode
b) MCB (feedback) was closed in AUT mode
c) Any other GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed.
The alarm is activated after 20s. However, the GCB (own) closing is blocked immediately for safety
reasons.
This protection can avoid e.g. potential direct closing of GCB while the controller’s bus conductors are
unintentionally unplugged from the terminals.
6.6.2 Synchronizing
SPtM: If the MCB is closed, the bus bar is considered to have identical voltage as measured on the
mains. If the mains voltage/frequency is within limits, the gen-set is first synchronized with the mains
and then the GCB is closed.
MINT: If the measured bus voltage is within limits, the gen-set is first synchronized with the bus and
then the GCB is closed.
The synchronizing consists of voltage matching and frequency/angle matching. The maximum
duration of synchronizing is given by the setpoint Sync Timeout. If the synchronizing is not successful
within this period of time, the Sync Timeout alarm will be issued.
NOTE:
The synchronization will be interrupted automatically if any of the necessary conditions disappear
during the synchronization process.
When the controller starts to synchronize (the event will change to “Synchro”) and the Main Measuring
screen is displayed, it will be automatically change to the Synchroscope screen for the entire duration
of synchronization. After synchronization the Synchroscope screen is automatically changed back to
the Main Measuring screen.
NT
NOTE:
It is also possible to change screens manually (arrows Up and Down) after displaying the
Synchroscope screen. In this case there is no automatic return to the Main Measuring screen after
synchronization is finished.
6.6.2.1 Voltage matching

The gen-set voltage is regulated to match the mains/bus voltage with tolerance given by the setpoint
Voltage Window. The regulation is adjusted by the setpoints Voltage Gain and Voltage Int.
6.6.2.2 Frequency/angle matching

The gen-set frequency is regulated to match the mains/bus frequency first. The frequency regulation
loop is active (setpoints Freq Gain and Freq Int). Once the frequency is matched, the regulation loop is
switched to match the angle (setpoint Angle Gain). When the angle is matched with tolerance +/-
Phase Window for a time given by the setpoint Dwell Time and the voltage is matched too, then the
GCB is closed.
NOTE:
The GCB close command will be not issued if the Phase Window setpoint is set to 0. Synchronizing
will continue until the Sync Timeout alarm occurs or the GCB is closed externally.
NOTE:
The matching loops will continue to run even if the GCB close command has been already issued until
the controller receives GCB feedback or a GCB fail alarm occurs. After the feedback has been
received, the control loops are switched to load and power factor loops or load and power factor
sharing respectively.
6.7 Parallel to mains operation – SPtM

SPtM only
After the gen-set has been synchronized to the mains, the parallel to mains operation follows. It
consists of the following phases:
6.7.1 Ramping the power up

The first phase of the PTM operation is ramping the gen-set up to the requested power level. The
speed of the ramp is given by the setpoint Load Ramp. The setpoint adjusts the ramp time for a
change from 0% to 100% of nominal power.
6.7.2 Load control

The load is maintained at the constant level given by the setpoint Baseload. Regulation adjustment
setpoints are available in the Sync/load control group.
NOTE:
In every moment when the requested load (e.g. baseload setpoint) changes, the ramp described in the
chapter above will also take place.
6.7.3 Power factor control

The power factor is regulated to a constant value given by the setpoint Base PF. PF regulation loop is
active. Regulation adjustment setpoints are available in the Volt/PF control group.
NT
6.7.4 Object load dependent auto start
The gen-set can start and stop automatically according to the object load. To enable this function, the
setpoint PeakAutS/S del must not be set to 0 (OFF). An automatic start will occur if the object exceeds
the limit given by the setpoint PeakLevelStart and remains exceeded for a period longer than
PeakAutS/S del. If the object load drops below PeakLevelStop, the gen-set will be stopped with the
same delay as during start. The gen-set load is controlled according to the selected mode (see
above).
NOTE:
The gen-set will continue to run if the binary input Rem Start/Stop is active.
6.7.5 Ramping the power down

When a stop command is received – e.g. the binary input Sys Start/Stop is deactivated or the STOP
button is pressed – the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB. The ramp speed is
given by the setpoint Load Ramp, the end level is given by GCB Open Level and the timeout for
finishing the ramping without reaching the open level is given by GCB open Del.
When the GCB button is pressed, the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB as well.
But after the GCB has been opened, the gen-set remains running until a stop command comes or the
GCB is pressed again to reclose the GCB.
Continue to the cool down and stop phase.
6.7.6 Peak load shaving

The gen-set can start and stop automatically according to the object load. An automatic start will occur
if the object load exceeds a given upper limit (PeakLevelStart) and remains exceeded for a given
period of time (PeakAutS/S Del). If the object load drops below a given lower limit (PeakLevelStop),
the gen-set will be stopped with the same delay period experienced during start.
Load [kW]
Covered by
Mains
Peak Level Start Start Start Covered by

Gen-set
Peak Level Stop Stop Stop
2:00 4:00 6:00 8:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 16:00 18:00 20:00 22:00 24:00 Time [h]
NOTE:
For this function it is necessary to use the IC-NT-CT-BIO7 extension module for measurement of
Mains 1Ph current. The Im/EF CT Ratio parameter must be set up according to the current measuring
transformer and the Im/EF input parameter must be set to Mains.
6.7.7 Export Limit

If Export Limit function is enabled, the value of power which is covered by mains is given by value of
setpoint Export kW. E.g. if 100 kW has to be covered always by mains the Export kW parameter is set
to -100 kW. The rest, all peaks, are then covered by gen-set or by group of gen-sets.
NT
NOTE:
If the Export kW setpoint is negative, it actually means import. This function can be used to protect the
system from unwanted export. You may set maximum export value or you can set it negative to keep
some import even in cases that there are abrupt load changes.
Import
Power Consumption of the Load
Required Power from gen-set
Controller decreases the required power from

gen-set to maintain the constant level of Import
from Mains as the load consumption decreases
No power is taken from the gen-set and the load

consumption still goes down, so the Import from
Mains cannot be maintained on the constant
level and it is starting to lower as well
Power imported from Mains
PRINCIPLE OF THE EXPORT LIMIT FUNCTION – IMPORT
NT
Export
Power Consumption of the Load

Load consumption goes to 0
Gen-set is still producing power to fulfill

the export requirement to the Mains
Required Power from gen-set
Gen-set is only exporting

below this level
0
Power exported to Mains
Negative value of
Import is Export
PRINCIPLE OF THE EXPORT LIMIT FUNCTION – EXPORT
NT
6.8 Parallel to mains operation – MINT
MINT only
If the MCB is closed (MCB feedback is present) and the gen-set has been synchronized to the bus
bar, the parallel to mains operation will follow. It consists of the following phases:
6.8.1 Ramping the power up

The first phase of the PTM operation is the ramping of the gen-set up to the desired power level
derived from the system baseload or up to the load given by load sharing with other gen-sets
connected to the bus bar. The speed of the ramp is given by the setpoint Load Ramp. The setpoint
adjusts the ramp time for a change from 0% to 100% of nominal power.
6.8.2 Load control modes

There are two load control modes – system baseload and load sharing – which are selected by the
setpoint #SysLdCtrl PtM. See the setpoint description for more information. If system baseload mode
is selected, the Load regulation loop is active to maintain the load at the requested level which is
derived from the system baseload. Each running gen-set takes a relatively equal part of the system
baseload.
In load sharing mode, the loop LS (load sharing) is active to maintain the load at the same relative
level as the other loaded gen-sets in the group. The behaviour in this case is identical to multiple
island mode.
NOTE:
The process of determining which gen-sets shall run is described in the power management chapter.
6.8.3 Power factor control

In system baseload mode the power factor is regulated to a constant value given by the setpoint
#SysPwrFactor. The PF regulation loop is active. In load sharing mode, also power factor sharing is
active to keep the power factor of all loaded gen-sets at an equal level. Regulation adjustment
setpoints are available in the Volt/PF control group.
6.8.4 Ramping the power down

When a stop command is received – e.g. power management or binary input Sys Start/Stop is
deactivated or the STOP button is pressed – the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the
GCB. The ramp speed is given by the setpoint Load Ramp, the end level is given by GCB Open Level
and the timeout for finishing the ramping without reaching the open level is given by GCB Open Del.
When the GCB button is pressed, the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB as well.
But after the GCB has been opened, the gen-set remains running until a stop command comes or the
GCB is pressed again to reclose the GCB.
6.9 Island operation – SPtM

SPtM only
A situation where the MCB is open and the load is supplied from the gen-set is called Island operation.
This situation will occur in the following cases:
1. The GCB has been closed to a dead bus bar, or

2. The gen-set was running parallel to the mains and the MCB has been opened.
NT
Neither voltage nor a frequency regulation loop is active. Keeping voltage and frequency at rated
values is the task of AVR and the governor.
When a stop command is received – e.g. the binary input Sys Start/Stop is deactivated or the STOP
button is pressed – the GCB will be opened and the gen-set will go to cool down phase.
NOTE:
When using the GCB button in MAN mode, the gen-set will not go to cool down and stop.
6.9.1 Island to PtM transfers

SPtM only
If the mains are OK, the gen-set can be transferred back to the parallel to mains operation. The
transfer can be done as no-break transfer (Reverse synchronizing) or break transfer (Changeover).
Which of these kinds will be performed depends on the binary input RevSyncDisable.
In AUT mode or TEST mode with automatic return, the reverse synchronizing or changeover is started
automatically after the mains have been restored and remain healthy for a period given by the setpoint
MainsReturnDel. Reverse synchronizing can be started manually by pressing MCB button in MAN
mode.
6.9.1.1 Reverse synchronizing

The reverse synchronizing process is identical to Forward synchronizing, but MCB is closed instead of
GCB. In the event that the reverse synchronizing is not successful, RevSyncTimeout alarm is issued
and the gen-set continues in island operation. After the alarm has been reset, the gen-set can try to
perform reverse synchronizing again.
6.9.1.2 Changeover
The changeover is performed if the reverse synchronizing is disabled with the RevSyncDisable binary
input.
The GCB is opened first and after a time period of Transfer Del the MCB is closed.
6.10 Island operation – MINT

MINT only
This chapter describes the situation where multiple gen-sets are running parallel to each other but not
with mains. This situation will occur either when:
1. The common bus bar is dead due to opened MCB or there are no mains at all and the group
of gen-sets has been activated, or
2. The group was running parallel to mains and the MCB has been opened.
NOTE:
The controller in MINT application does not control the MCB! Only the MCB position is evaluated from
the binary input MCB Feedback and the position is the basic source of information for switching
between island and parallel to mains operation.
If the bus bar is empty, the first gen-set will close its GCB without synchronizing. Following gen-sets
will synchronize to the already energized bus bar. In the event that multiple gen-sets start
simultaneously and the bus bar is empty, the system will prevent closing of multiple GCBs to the bus
bar without synchronizing. Instead of this, one of the gen-sets will close the GCB and energize the bus
bar and the others will wait and then synchronize to the bus bar.
When a stop command is received, e.g. from the power management or binary input Sys Start/Stop is
deactivated or the STOP button is pressed, the GCB will be opened and the gen-set will go to cool
down phase.
NT
NOTE:
Using the GCB button in MAN mode the gen-set will not go to cool down and stop.
6.11 Power management

MINT only
The power management is related to MINT application only. Power management is the process of
automatic starts and stops of gen-sets within the group, depending on current load, state of the gen-
sets and other conditions.
6.11.1 The concept

The power management is based on the load of the gen-sets, i.e. next gen-set will start when the load
of the group raises above certain level. A next gen-set will stop, when the load drops down below a
certain level. The process of determining of starts and stops is done in each controller; there is no
"master" in the system. Each of the controllers can be switched off without influencing the complete
system (except the situation when the respective gen-set will be not available...)
The load of the group is evaluated as so called reserve. The reserve is calculated as difference
between actual and nominal load of running gen-sets. The reserve can be calculated as absolute (in
kW) or relative (in %). Use the setpoint #PowerMgmt Mode to set the calculation method.
NOTE:
Power management based on relative reserves perfectly fits for applications, where the load portions
connected to the group at once are much lower than the gen-set capacity. This mode helps to achieve
maximal lifetime of the gen-sets, as they can be operated within optimal load range. The maximal
size of the load connected at once depends on number of actually working gen-sets. The more
gen-sets are connected to the busbar, the bigger a load portion can be connected at once.
Power management based on absolute reserves can be successfully used also for cases where the
load portions are similar to the gen-set capacity or even bigger. The goal of the absolute reserve mode
is that the system provides always the same reserve power capacity independent of how many
gen-sets are currently running and this why this mode perfectly fits for industrial plants with large
loads.
There is a new way of power management implemented (Efficient mode; LDS) since version IC-NT
2.0. Basic principles and functions are explained in the chapter below.
CAUTION!
The function of the controller is designed to handle the maximum sum of nominal power at 32000kW
(3200.0kW, depending on the power format in the controller). If the sum of nominal power of all gen-
sets connected to the intercontroller CAN exceeds these values the power format needs to be
changed accordingly.
Example: There are 20 gen-sets each with 1000kW of nominal power. The sum of the nominal power
is 20000kW. Therefore the decimal power format in 0.1kW cannot be used because the sum exceeds
32767. Therefore power format in kW needs to be chosen.
6.11.2 Basics
 The setpoint Pwr Management enables and disables the gen-set to be active within the power
management of the group and make automatic load demand start/stop or swap. If the power
NT
management is disabled, the gen-set will run or not depending only on the binary input Sys
Start/Stop and the start and stop will not depend on the load of the group.
 The binary input Sys Start/Stop activates and deactivates the gen-set. If the input is not active,
the gen-set will stop with delay #SysAMFstopDel after the input has been deactivated and will
not start again. It can be started in MAN mode only. When the input is activated again, the
delay #SysAMFstrtDel will start to count down and after that the gen-set is activated and can
start due to power management.
NOTE:
The gen-set will take part of the power management (= will be active) only if the controller is in AUT
mode!
NOTE:
The gen-set performs load and VAR sharing whenever it is connected to the busbar i.e. it is
independent on whether the controller is in AUT or MAN mode or whether the power management is
active or not.
6.11.3 Reserves, minimal running power

∑ 𝑷𝒂𝒄𝒕
 The value 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∙ (𝟏 − ∑ ) [%] is called relative reserve. It is the difference between the
𝑷𝒏𝒐𝒎
actual relative load and 100%.
 The value ∑ 𝑷𝒏𝒐𝒎 − ∑ 𝑷𝒂𝒄𝒕 [kW] is called absolute reserve. It is the difference between the
actual load of the group and the nominal capacity of currently loaded gen-sets.
Running ActPwr = the sum of the actual load of all active gen-sets within the group, that
∑ 𝑃𝑎𝑐𝑡 are connected to the bus. In parallel to mains operation and baseload mode the
baseload level is used in the equation instead of the actual gen-sets load.
Running NomPwr = the sum of the nominal power of all active gen-sets within the
∑ 𝑃𝑛𝑜𝑚
group, that are connected to the bus.
 If the current system reserve drops below the adjusted reserve for start, the delay
#NextStrt Del will start to count down on the gen-sets, which have decided to start. If the
reserve remains under the limit for the entire countdown period, the gen-set(s) will start.
 If the system reserve drops below zero (i.e. the system is overloaded), the delay
#OverldNext Del will start to count down on the gen-sets, which have decided to start. If the
reserve remains under the limit for the whole countdown period, the gen-set(s) will start.
 If the system reserve goes above over the adjusted reserve for stop, the delay
#NextStopDel will start to count down on the gen-sets, which have decided to stop. If the
reserve still remains over the limit, the gen-sets will stop.
 There are two pairs of setpoints for adjusting reserves for start and stop. Normally the pair
#LoadResStrt 1 and #LoadResStop 1 is active. By the binary input Load Reserve 2 the
second pair #LoadResStrt 2 and #LoadResStop 2 is activated.
 With adjusting nonzero value to the setpoint #Min Run Power and activating the function by
binary input Min Run Power => based on the nominal power, the gen-sets needed for
equalizing the actual MinRunPower requirement are started (or kept running even if stop
reserve is fulfilled). Note, that LBI’s Min Run Power needs to be activated on all gen-sets in
the same time.
6.11.4 Priorities
 The priority of the gen-set within the group is determined by the setpoint Priority. A lower
number represents “higher” priority, i.e. a gen-set with a lower number will start before another
one with higher number.
NT
 For Load Demand Star/Stop regime:
- If the binary input Top Priority is active, the gen-set gets highest priority (0)
independent of the setpoint setting.
- If more than one gen-set have the same priority, they will act as “one big” gen-set.
 For Load Demand Swap regime and Run Hour Equalisation:
- Priorities are managen automatically by the controller and value written in the setpoint
is ignored
- Binary input Top Priority has no function
6.11.5 Load Demand Start/Stop
 The controller will decide to start the gen-set at the moment when the reserve has dropped
below the reserve for start and the gen-sets with higher priorities (lower priority numbers), that
are available for power management, do not have enough capacity to get the reserve back
over the start level or cannot fulfil the adjusted minimal running power
 The controller will decide to stop the gen-set at the moment when the reserve has increased
over the reserve for stop and the gen-sets with higher priorities (lower priority numbers), that
are available for power management, have enough capacity to keep the reserve over the start
level and also can fulfil the adjusted minimal running power
NOTE:
When evaluating the stop condition, the controller computes actual reserve without taking in account
its own nominal power, i.e. it evaluates how the reserve will be if the respective gen-set stops.
NT
Load
[kW]
Pg_nom_1+Pg_nom_2+Pg_nom_3 [kW]
Pnom Gen-set 3
Priority 3
LoadRes Stop [kW]
Pg_nom_1+Pg_nom_2 [kW]
Pnom Gen-set 2
Priority 2
LoadRes Strt [kW]

LoadRes Strt [kW] LoadRes Stop [kW]
Pg_nom_1 [kW]
Pnom Gen-set 1
Priority 1
LoadRes Stop [kW]
t < #NextStrt Del t
Sys Start/Stop
#SysAMFstopDel
Gen-set 1
#SysAMFstrtDel
running
Gen-set 2
#NextStrt Del
running
Gen-set 3 #NextStop Del

running #NextStrt Del
#NextStop Del
POWER MANAGEMENT WITH ABSOLUTE RESERVES
NT
Load
[kW]
100% Pg_nom_1+Pg_nom_2+Pg_nom_3
Pnom Gen-set 3
Priority 3
LoadRes Stop [%]
100% Pg_nom_1+Pg_nom_2
Pnom Gen-set 2
Priority 2
LoadRes Strt [%]

LoadRes Strt [%] LoadRes Stop [%]
100% Pg_nom_1
Pnom Gen-set 1
Priority 1
LoadRes Stop [%]
t < #NextStrt Del t
Sys Start/Stop
#SysAMFstopDel
Gen-set 1
#SysAMFstrtDel
running
Gen-set 2
#NextStrt Del
running
Gen-set 3 #NextStop Del

running #NextStrt Del
#NextStop Del
POWER MANAGEMENT WITH RELATIVE RESERVES
6.11.6 Reaction to alarms
 If a Shutdown or BOC alarm occurs, the gen-set will be taken out from the power
management and the next gen-set will start if necessary.
 If a Slow stop alarm occurs, the gen-set will be taken out from the power management, but the
alarm will be suppressed for a definite period of time to give the next gen-set chance to start
and connect to the bus to get the reserve back over the start level. The alarm is suppressed
until the reserve gets back over the start level (this can occur either because the next gen-set
has connected to the bus or the load has decreased) or the timeout given by the setpoint
#SlowStopDel has elapsed. The alarm will not be suppressed if there is no other available
gen-set that can start.
6.11.7 Related binary inputs
1. Sys Start/Stop
2. Load Reserve 2
3. Top Priority
4. Min Run Power
NT
6.11.8 Related binary outputs
1. System Ready
2. SystReserve OK
3. EnginesSwapped
6.11.9 Load Demand Swap

There is a new way of power management implemented (Efficient mode; LDS) since version IC-NT
2.0. Basic principles and functions are explained in the chapter below.
CAUTION!
NT
MainsCompact is not supported for use with IC-NT 2.0+ firmware. Please use IC-NT 1.4.5 instead.
Principles of the Load Demand Swap (#PriorAutoSwap = EFFICENT)
To evaluate, which gen-set will start as next, two situations need to be distinguished:
1) First start (activation of Sys Start/Stop binary input)

2) Already running group of gen-sets
Add1) master controller (the one with the lowest CAN address) makes the calculation and sorts all
the gen-sets in the group based on their nominal power and running hours from the biggest to
smallest. Gen-set which fulfils following formula will be selected:
Pnom < #LoadResStrt 1
Where Pnom is the nominal power of the selected gen-set
If two gen-sets with the same nominal power are available, the one with least amount of run hours is
started.
Add2)
a) Master controller on the fly sorts available gen-sets based on their nominal power from the
biggest to smallest
b) If two or more gen-sets with the same nominal power are available, least amount of run hours is
preferred (lower run hours = higher priority)
c) Selection of which gen-set has to start next is from the bottom of the list to the top (small gen-
set starts first) following formula:
Pnom > Load demand + #LoadResStrt 1
Where Pnom is the nominal power of selected gen-set
d) If load demand is higher than nominal power of the biggest gen-set, this one is fixed and the
whole process repeats from c).
e) For gen-sets with the same nominal power also run hour equalization will be performed.
NT
Example:
#PowerMgmtMode = ABS
#LoadResStrt 1 = 20kW
#LoadResStop 1 = 30kW
G1 G2 G3 G4
CAN 2
50kW 100kW 300kW 50kW

100h 100h 100h 0h
Load Demand Swap related setpoints and values:
6.11.10 Related binary inputs
1. Sys Start/Stop
2. Load Reserve 2
3. Min Run Power
6.11.11 Related binary outputs
1. System Ready
2. SystReserve OK
3. EnginesSwapped
6.11.12 “How to” examples:

 How to set EFFICENT mode (Load demand swap function); available since IC-NT 2.0
In Pwr management setpoint group:

 make sure Power Management is enabled (Pwr Management = ENABLED)
 set #PowerMgmtMode = ABS (kW)
 set #PriorAutoSwap = EFFICIENT
 select appropriate load reserve for start (#LoadResStrt 1)
 select appropriate reserve for stop (#LoadResStop 1)
 set suitable delay for power band change (PwrBnChngDlUp / PwrBnChngDlDn)
NT
 How to set Load demand start/stop power management (Load Demand Start/Stop)

 set #PowerMgmtMode = ABS (kW) or REL (%)
 set the priority of the gen-set (Priorty)
 set #PriorAutoSwap = DISABLED (controller will not change priorities in the
background and will respect the value set in Priority setpoint)
 select appropriate load reserve for start (#LoadResStrt 1)
 select appropriate reserve for stop (#LoadResStop 1)
 How to set Running hours equalization function

 set #PriorAutoSwap = RUN HOURS
 select appropriate #RunHoursBase if necesary
 select appropriate #RunHrsMaxDiff to set maximum allowed Running hours difference
between gen-sets
6.11.13 Related setpoints and values

Related setpoints and values are collected to the Power management setpoint, namely the values
group.
6.12 AMF function

SPtM only
The “AMF function” represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop
after the mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by the setpoint
AMFStartEnable.
NOTE:
The AMF function works only in AUT mode!
6.12.1 Mains failure detection

The mains are considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
 The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains >V and Mains <V for a time
period longer than Mains V Del.
 The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains >Freq and Mains <Freq
for a time period longer than Mains Freq Del.
 The Vector shift protection occurs.
 The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm MCB fail still was not reset.
 The binary input Ext MF Relay is active.
6.12.1.1 Vector shift

If a mains failure occurs during parallel to mains operation, in most cases it causes a fast change of
the generator load. This change can be measured as a jump of the vector of the generator voltage and
evaluated as a symptom of mains failure. The vector shift limit for evaluation of a mains failure is
adjustable by the setpoint VectorShiftLim.
NT
NOTE:
Vector shift is evaluated only while the gen-set is working parallel to the mains.
If vector shift protection is activated mains circuit breaker is opened.
6.12.2 Healthy mains detection

The mains are considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:
 The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains >V and Mains <V.
 The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains >Freq and Mains <Freq.
 The alarm MCB fail is not active.
 The binary input Ext MF Relay is not active.
NOTE:
There is a hysteresis for Mains under and over voltage added in the same way as in the InteliLiteNT
family.
6.12.3 The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
1. If the setpoint MCB Opens On is set to MAINSFAIL, the MCB is opened

2. The timer for automatic start of the gen-set EmergStart Del begins to count down.
3. After the timer has elapsed, the gen-set is started.
NOTE:
The automatic start of the gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the input
MainsFailBlock. If the gen-set is already running and the input is activated, the gen-set will
cool down and stop. The control of breakers is not affected by this input.
4. If the setpoint MCB Opens On is set to GENRUN, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits.
5. If the mains are restored to health and the gen-set is still not connected to the load, the
controller interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.
6. The GCB is closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load.
7. After the mains are restored to normal, the timer MainsReturnDel begins to count down and
when finished, either reverse synchronizing or switchover is performed. This depends on the
binary input RevSyncDisable. If active, switchover is performed instead of reverse
synchronizing.
8. Maximum time between closing of GCB and opening MCB is given by the setpoint
BreakerOverlap.
9. If no demand for parallel operation is active (binary input Rem Start/Stop), the GCB is opened
and the gen-set cools down and a stop follows.
NOTE:
For a description of how to make a test of AMF function, see the chapter operating modes, TEST
mode paragraph.
6.13 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase follows after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been
opened.
 Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time.
NT
 Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections
are evaluated) or at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not
evaluated). Selection of the speed is done by the setpoint Cooling Speed.
 The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
 If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the gen-set will go back to
the stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not
count down again so the GCB is immediately ready to be closed.
When the cool down is finished, the output Fuel Solenoid is de-energized and Stop Solenoid is
energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time. If the
engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Stop fail will be issued.
The output Stop Solenoid is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of Stop
Time. If the Stop time has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the stop solenoid is de-
energized for 5 s and then energized again for max. Stop time and this repeats until the engine is
stopped.
The output Ignition is continuously energized until the engine is stopped.
6.13.1 Stopped gen-set evaluation

The gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
 The engine speed is lower than 2 revs (RPM).

 The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 50 V.
 None of additional running indication signals is active. See the chapter Speed sensing for
details.
6.14 Alarm management

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is
only informative and does not take any action regarding gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm –
represents a critical situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the gen-set or
technology.
 One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input

 Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input
 There are also built-in alarms with fixed alarm types.
 Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist.
 Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
 Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
 Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an e-mail.
NT
Analog No alarm Yellow alarm Red alarm
value issued issued issued
Red alarm
level
Yellow alarm
level
alarm
delay
alarm
delay
Time [s]
t < alarm delay
ANALOG INPUT ALARM EVALUATION PRINCIPLE
6.14.1 Alarm handling

 There are two different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated.
The category is selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in
alarms. The categories are the following:
1) The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
2) The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used
for e.g. oil pressure. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been
started with the delay given by the setpoint ProtectHoldOff.
3) The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be
evaluated after the engine has been started and Max Stab Time has elapsed or the
GCB has been closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only
Generator under/overvoltage, Generator voltage unbalance and Generator
under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not configurable to
binary and analog input alarms.
 If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of
evaluation will start to run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms,
analog input alarms) or is fixed to 500ms (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions
persist, the alarm will activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while
the delay is still running.
 After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FaultResButton, all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon
as the respective condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the
alarm, the alarm will remain in the Alarmlist as Inactive. See also the Browsing alarms
chapter.
NOTE:
The input Sd Override can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the engine. This
input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the gen-set
drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).
6.14.2 Alarm states

An alarm can have following states:
NT
 Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
 Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
 Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.
6.14.3 Alarm types – Yellow level

The yellow alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached
critical level. Obviously it is indicated by a yellow colour. This alarm does not cause any actions
regarding the gen-set control.
6.14.3.1 Warning (WRN)

The Warning alarm does not perform any actions regarding gen-set control.
6.14.4 Alarm types – Red level

The red level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been
reached. Obviously it is indicated by red colour. The controller will take one of the following actions:
6.14.4.1 Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The BOC (electric trip) alarm category is used above all for built-in alarms assigned to the generator
electric values (voltage, current, power, etc.). The GCB is opened immediately, but after that the
engine will perform the standard stop procedure including cooling.
6.14.4.2 Slow stop (STP)

The Slow stop alarm differs from the BOC in that the gen-set will perform a soft unload before opening
the GCB (if possible). After that the standard stop procedure including cooling follows.
NOTE:
In the MINT application if the power management is active and a slow stop alarm occurs, the controller
will wait until another gen-set is started (if there is at least one available) before unloading and
stopping the gen-set. The maximum time the controller will wait is given by the setpoint #SlowStopDel.
6.14.4.3 Shutdown (SD)

The Shutdown alarm opens the GCB immediately and stops the engine immediately without cooling.
NOTE:
It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.
CAUTION!
The gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an active red alarm
and the controller is in AUT or TEST mode!
6.14.5 Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance (or voltage or current in case of IGS-PTM module) on an analog input
exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a sensor fail message will appear in the
Alarmlist. The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL) and most-right (RH) points of the sensor
characteristic ±12.5% from RH-RL.
NT
Bar rea
fa il a
so r
10.6 Sen
10
12.5% of the
0 sensor range
10 100% of the sensor range 180 191 Ω

First point of
Sensor fail limit would be -1 Last point of the
the curve Sensor fail limit
Ohm what is physically curve
imposible so sensor fail is not
detected even for 0 ohm
SENSOR FAIL EVALUATION EXAMPLE

NOTE:
The sensor fail alarm does not influence the gen-set operation.
6.14.6 Remote alarm messaging

If a GSM modem and/or Internet Bridge are connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS
messages and/or emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist. The message will
contain a copy of the Alarmlist.
To enable this function, you should select with setpoints Yel Alarm Msg and Red Alarm Msg the levels
of alarms to be announced (red/yellow/both) and also enter a valid GSM phone number and/or e-mail
address to the setpoints TelNo/Addr Ch1 and TelNo/Addr Ch2. It is possible to set either a GSM
number or e-mail at both setpoints.
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:
Active alarm Active event Active alarm Active event

Terminal
sms sms email email
IB-Lite NA NA yes yes
IB-NT yes yes yes yes*
Not Not
IL-NT-GPRS yes yes
supported supported
*since IB-NT 2.2.0
Controller is capable to detect which communication terminal is connected to the network and send
the email/SMS via the active one. InternetBridge-NT is preferred terminal if more possibilities are
detected.
NT
NOTE:
An internet module must be available for sending e-mails and a GSM modem is necessary for sending
SMS. See the Communications chapter for more information.
6.14.7 Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller
display, if a new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu
 It can contain up to 16 alarms, but the first 7 are visible on the screen. If it is full, recently
coming alarms are not displayed.
 Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk
before them.
 An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type
(e.g. WRN). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.
NOTE:
The Alarmlist can be read out from the controller via Modbus. See the Modbus description chapter.
6.14.8 ECU Alarmlist

The ECU Alarmlist contains alarms that are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by
the Diagnostic Trouble Code, which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm
occurred, the alarm type and the alarm occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a
numeric code and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.
NOTE:
The ECU AlarmList is visible only if an ECU is configured.
NT
6.14.9 Built-in alarms
ANSI CODE PROTECTION (ALARM)
Emergency stop
12 Engine overspeed
14 Engine underspeed
Start Fail
RPM measurement failure
Stop Fail
GCB Fail
MCB Fail
Forward synchronization timeout
Reverse synchronization timeout
32 Generator overload
32R Generator reverse power
59, 27 Generator under/overvoltage
47 Generator voltage unbalance
81H, 81L Generator under/overfrequency
51 Generator overcurrent
50 Generator short current
46 Generator current unbalance
47 Phase sequence
Maintenance timer
Charging alternator fail
Battery voltage
Governor output at limit
AVR output at limit
Battery flat
Low backup battery
6.15 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the
system at moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for
diagnostics of failures and problems. Its capacity is over 100 records and it works as FIFO, i.e. the
newest record overwrites the oldest one.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
 The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overspeed alarm” or “GCB closed”)
 The date and time when it was recorded
 All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event
occurred.
BASIC VALUES
NT
NAME ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the

Number Num
previous one, etc.)
Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the
Reason Reason
gen-set
Date Date Date
Time Time Time
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1
Oil Pressure OilP Oil pressure measured on the first analog input
Engine Temperature EngT Engine temperature measured on the second analog input
Fuel Level FLvl Fuel level measured on the third analog input
Analog Input Module AIM1 Analog input 1 on IG-IOM extension module
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
Binary Input Module BIM Binary inputs on IG-IOM extension module
Binary Inputs/Outputs
BIOE Extension Module Binary Inputs/Outputs
Extension
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Binary Outputs Module BOM Binary outputs on IG-IOM extension module
Speed regulator output (see chapter Speed Governor
Speed Regulator Output SRO
Interface)
Voltage Regulator Output VRO Voltage regulator output (see chapter AVR Interface)
6.15.1.1 ECU values

ECU VALUES
NAME ABBREVIATION
ECU Fuel rate EFR

ECU Coolant Temperature ECT
ECU Intake temperature EIT
ECU Oil pressure EOP
ECU Oil temperature EOT
NT
ECU Boost pressure EBP
ECU Percent load at current speed EPL
ECU Fuel Level EFL
ECU Fault Code FC
Failure Mode Identifier FMI
6.15.1.2 SPtM specific values

SPTM VALUES
Mains Frequency Mfrq Mains frequency

Mains Voltage Vm1 Mains voltage Ph1
Mains Active Power Pmns Mains active power
Mains Reactive Power Qmns Mains reactive power
Mains Power Factor MPF Mains power factor
Mains Load Character MLCh Mains load character
Mains Vector Shift MVS Mains vector shift
6.15.1.3 MINT specific values

Information about gen-sets with GCB closed and their overall P and Q. Values can be also found in
LiteEdit Values / Pwr Management and Info (LE ver. 4.4 and higher).
MINT VALUES
Bus Frequency Bfrq Bus frequency
Bus Voltage Vb1 Bus voltage Ph1
ActualReserve Ares Actual reserve
GensLoaded16 GL16 Each bit if set represents gent-set with its GCB closed
GensLoaded32 GL32 Each bit if set represents gent-set with its GCB closed
Running ActPwr TRPA Overall power from gen-set with its GCB closed
Overall reactive power from gen-set with its GCB

Running Q-Pwr TRQA
closed
Running Nominal Power TRPN Total running nominal power
Available Nominal Power APN Available nominal power
NT
NOTE:
The contents of the history log will be deleted after programming firmware or configuration into the
controller.
The history log can be displayed on the controller screen or in LiteEdit. If an archive (*.ail file) is saved
in LiteEdit, it will also contain the history log. The archive can be later opened in offline mode to view
the history log offline.
NOTE:
The first history record after the controller is switched on, programmed or a watchdog reset occurs
contains diagnostic values instead of operational values. Some fields in these records may seem to
have nonsense values. Do not take these values into account.
6.16 Exercise timers

There are two exercise timers available in the controller, which are based on the RTC clock. They are
both identical.
Each timer has the following settings (in the Date/Time setpoint group).
NT
6.16.1 MINT
There is no function other than activation of the binary outputs Exerc Timer 1 or Exerc
No Func
Timer 2.
Mode When this option is chosen, the Timer output is also internally connected to the
OFF Remote OFF binary input.
AutoRun When this option is chosen, the Timer directly starts gen-set (in AUT mode).
6.16.2 SPtM
There is no other function besides binary output Exerc Timer 1 or Exerc Timer 2
No Func
activation.
Mode When this option is chosen, the Timer output is also internally connected to the
OFF Remote OFF binary input.
When this option is chosen, the Timer output is also internally connected to the
MFail Blk
MainsFailBlock binary input.
When this option is chosen, the Timer output is also internally connected to the
TEST
Remote TEST binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen, the Timer output is also internally connected to the Rem
OnLd TEST OnLd binary input.
The timer outputs are available as binary outputs Exerc Timer 1 and Exerc Timer 2.
NOTE:
Timers are activated even in the middle of the cycle. This means that even when the controller is
switched on after the moment when the timer should have been started and before it should have
finished, the timer is activated for the remainder of the duration period.
Timer functions can be activated only in AUT mode (not in OFF, MAN or TEST). There are 2 timers.
In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Timer 1 has a higher priority than Timer 2.
6.17 Analog switches

One analog switch (comparator) is assigned to each analog input to the controller. The switches are
suitable for preheat control, day tank fuel pump control and others.
 Associated setpoints are located in the setpoint group Analog switches.

 One binary output is associated with each switch
The behaviour of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.
NT
SWITCH
OUTPUT
LEVEL ON > LEVEL OFF
ON
OFF
LEVEL OFF LEVEL ON ANALOG VALUE
SWITCH
OUTPUT
LEVEL ON < LEVEL OFF
ON
OFF
LEVEL ON LEVEL OFF ANALOG VALUE
6.18 Power switch

There is also one switch assigned to the gen-set active power, which is called the Power switch. The
setpoints for on and off level adjustment are located in the setpoint group Analog switches. The output
is provided as the binary output Power switch.
The behaviour of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.
SWITCH
OUTPUT
LEVEL ON > LEVEL OFF
ON
OFF
LEVEL OFF LEVEL ON ANALOG VALUE
SWITCH
OUTPUT
LEVEL ON < LEVEL OFF
ON
OFF
LEVEL ON LEVEL OFF ANALOG VALUE
6.19 Regulation loops

The following table shows which setpoints influence regulation in which situation.
6.19.1 SPtM
SPEED REGULATOR OUTPUT FOR SINGLE GEN-SET APPLICATION
LOADED IN PARALLEL
ISLAND LOADED ISLAND PARALLEL TO M AINS
TO M AINS
Running GCB closed GCB closed

Synchronizing
GCB opened MCB opened MCB closed
NT
Speed/frequency
control loop:
Power control loop:
SRO output value = SRO output value = Freq Gain
Load Gain
Speed Gov Bias Speed Gov Bias Freq Int
Load Int
Angle control loop:
Angle Gain
VOLTAGE REGULATOR OUTPUT FOR SINGLE GEN-SET APPLICATION
ISLAND LOADED ISLAND PARALLEL TO M AINS LOADED IN PARALLEL TO M AINS

Synchronizing
Voltage control loop: Voltage control loop: Voltage control loop: Power factor control loop:
Voltage Gain Voltage Gain Voltage Gain PF Gain
Voltage Int Voltage Int Voltage Int PF Int
6.19.2 MINT
SPEED REGULATOR OUTPUT FOR MULTIPLE GEN-SET APPLICATION
LOADED IN
ISLAND LOADED ISLAND PARALLEL TO M AINS
PARALLEL TO M AINS

Synchronizing
Speed/frequency control Speed/frequency

loop: control loop:
Power control loop:
SRO output value = LoadShare Gain Freq Gain
Load Gain
Speed Gov Bias LoadShare Int Freq Int
Load Int
background nominal Angle control loop:
frequency matching Angle Gain
VOLTAGE REGULATOR OUTPUT FOR MULTIPLE GEN-SET APPLICATION
MULTIPLE LOADED MULTIPLE PARALLEL TO MULTIPLE LOADED IN PARALLEL

MULTIPLE ISLAND
ISLAND M AINS TO M AINS

Synchronizing
Voltage control Voltage control

Voltage control loop: Power factor control loop:
loop: loop:
Voltage Gain PF Gain
Voltage Gain VAr Share Gain
Voltage Int PF Int
Voltage Int VAr Share Int
The following regulation loops are built into the controller. All of them are PI type except angle loop,
which is P type.
NOTE:
Since IC-NT SW v. 1.4.1 only the first controller (with the lowest address at the CAN has) active
voltage control loop. Other controllers are adapting voltage according to bus to the first one. All
controllers have active VAr Share regulation loop.
NT
6.19.3 Regulation control loops overview
6.19.3.1 Speed/frequency control loop

The speed/frequency control loop is active during the synchronization, when the gen-set frequency is
controlled to the same value as the mains or bus have, i.e. to achieve zero slip frequency.
6.19.3.2 Differential angle control loop

The differential angle control loop is active during the synchronization, when the “near to zero” slip
frequency has been successfully achieved and then the differential angle between generator and
mains/bus voltage shall be reduced to zero.
6.19.3.3 Power control loop

The power control loop is active during the parallel to mains operation. The recognition of parallel to
mains operation is done on the basis of the binary input MCB feedback. In MINT the setpoint
#SysLdCtrl PtM must be also set to BASELOAD.
6.19.3.4 Load sharing control loop

The load sharing control loop is active in MINT, whenever the GCB is closed and the binary input MCB
feedback is not active or the setpoint #SysLdCtrl PtM is in LDSHARING position.
6.19.3.5 Voltage control loop

The voltage control loop is active during synchronization (the generator voltage is controlled to the
same value as the mains or bus have) and during island operation in SPtM (the gen-set voltage is
controlled to the nominal voltage). During multiple island operation in MINT, the voltage control loop is
also running “in the background” of the VAr sharing loop (using P, I parameters multiplied by 0.1) to
maintain the voltage at the nominal level.
NOTE:
Since IC-NT SW v. 1.4.1 only the first controller (with the lowest address at the CAN has) active
voltage control loop. Other controllers are adapting voltage according to bus to the first one. All
controllers have active VAr Share regulation loop.
6.19.3.6 Power factor control loop

The power factor control loop is active during the parallel to mains operation. The recognition of
parallel to mains operation is done on the basis of the binary input MCB feedback.
6.19.3.7 VAr sharing control loop

The VAr sharing control loop is active during multiple island operation in MINT application.
6.19.4 PI regulation adjustment

The exact adjustment of a PI loop always depends on the engine and generator characteristics.
However, a general rule can be followed in the beginning of the adjustment process:
 Prepare the system for adjustment, i.e. set the limits for related alarms temporarily to values
which will disable the alarms, set the synchro timeout to the maximum value, etc.
 Adjust the gain to 5% and integration to 0%.
 Switch the gen-set to MAN mode, start it and put it into the operation phase, where the
appropriate regulation loop is active.
 Increase the gain slightly until the controlled quantity starts to oscillate. Then put it back to
approx. one half of the value where the oscillations started.
NT
 Increase the integrative factor slightly to achieve acceptable response to changes. Too small
an I-factor will cause an excessively slow response, while too high an I-factor will cause
overshooting or even oscillations.
NOTE:
It may be helpful to disable issuing the GCB close command when adjusting synchronization loops.
Adjust the setpoint Phase Window to 0 to disable it. Adjust the setpoint back to its original value after
the adjustment is finished.
CAUTION!
Be ready to press the emergency stop button in the event that the regulation loop starts to behave
unacceptably.
NT
7 Setpoints
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the
specific environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can
be adjusted from the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
7.1 Password protection

Each setpoint can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection
can be assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure. See the chapter Operator guide
for instructions on how to enter and modify a password. See also the LiteEdit help to learn about
working with a password in LiteEdit.
7.2 Setpoint synchronization

Setpoints marked with a “#” sign at the beginning of their names are synchronized with other
controllers present on the CAN bus line, i.e. the system will ensure that the respective setpoint will
have an identical value in each connected controller. If the setpoint is changed in one controller, the
same change will occur in all other controllers. This function is necessary especially for MINT
application, where the system of Power management is based on fact that the respective setpoints are
identical in all controllers.
All parameters marked as shared (“#”) are overwritten during archive download in case there is no
another single controller visible on the CAN bus. In case there is another controller on the CAN bus,
the shared parameters are not overwritten.
7.3 Setpoint groups

1. Process Control
2. Basic Settings
3. Comms Settings
4. Engine Params
5. Engine Protect
6. Gener Protect
7. Pwr Management
8. AMF Settings
9. Sync/Load Ctrl
10. Volt/PF Control
11. ExtI/O Protect
12. SMS/E-Mail
13. AnalogSwitches
14. Date/Time
15. Sensors Spec
CAUTION!
Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing of baseload
setpoint via Modbus) The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be overwritten up to
5
10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when the allowed number
of writing cycles is exceeded!
NT
7.3.1 Setpoints – Process Control
1. Baseload
2. Base PF
3. AMFStartEnable
4. Export Limit
5. Export kW
6. #SysLdCtrl PtM
7. #SysBaseLoad
8. #SysPwrFactor
9. Synchro Enable
10. PeakLevelStart
11. PeakLevelStop
12. PeakAutS/S Del
13. #Neutral cont
7.3.2 Setpoints – Basic Settings
1. ControllerName
2. Nominal Power
3. Nomin Current
4. CT Ratio
5. EF CT Ratio
6. Im/EF CT Ratio
7. Im/EF input
8. Nominal Volts
9. PT Ratio
10. Vm PT Ratio
11. Vb PT Ratio
12. Nominal Freq
13. Nominal RPM
14. Gear Teeth
15. ControllerMode
16. Reset To MAN
17. Backlight time
7.3.3 Setpoints – Comms Settings
1. ControllerAddr
2. COM1 Mode
3. COM2 Mode
4. ModemIniString
5. ModbusComSpeed
6. CAN Bus Mode
7. IBLite IP Addr
8. IBLite NetMask
9. IBLite GateIP
10. IBLite DHCP
11. ComAp Port
12. APN Name
13. APN UserName
14. APN UserPass
15. AirGate
16. AirGate IP
17. SMTP UserName
18. SMTP UserPass
19. SMTP Server IP
NT
20. Contr MailBox
21. Time Zone
22. DNS IP Address
7.3.4 Setpoints – Engine Params
1. Starting RPM
2. Start W Freq
3. Starting Oil P
4. Prestart Time
5. MaxCrank Time
6. CrnkFail Pause
7. Crank Attempts
8. Idle Time
9. Min Stab Time
10. Max Stab Time
11. Cooling Speed
12. Cooling Time
13. Stop Time
14. SDVentil Time
15. Fuel Solenoid
16. D+ Function
17. ECU FreqSelect
18. MaxFuelDrop
19. FuelTankVolume
7.3.5 Setpoints – Engine Protect
1. Horn Timeout
2. ProtectHoldOff
3. Overspeed Sd
4. Batt Overvolt
5. Batt Undervolt
6. Batt Volt Del
7. AI1 Yel
8. AI1 Red
9. AI1 Del
10. AI2 Yel
11. AI2 Red
12. AI2 Del
13. AI3 Yel
14. AI3 Red
15. AI3 Del
16. WrnMaintenance
7.3.6 Setpoints – Gener Protect
1. Overload BOC
2. Overload Del
3. Amps IDMT Del
4. Short Crct BOC
5. Short Crct Del
6. Amps Unbal BOC
7. Amps Unbal Del
8. EarthFault Sd
NT
9. EarthFault Del
10. Gen >V Sd
11. Gen <V BOC
12. Gen V Del
13. Volt Unbal BOC
14. Volt Unbal Del
15. Gen >Freq BOC
16. Gen <Freq BOC
17. Gen Freq Del
18. BusMeasError
19. Reverse Pwr BOC
20. Reverse Pwr Del
21. ExcitationLoss
22. ExctLoss Del
7.3.7 Setpoints – Pwr Management

MINT only
1. Pwr Management
2. Pwr Manag Del
3. #PowerMgmtMode
4. Priority
5. #PriorAutoSwap
6. #SysAMFstrtDel
7. #SysAMFstopDel
8. #LoadResStrt 1
9. #LoadResStop 1
10. #LoadResStrt 2
11. #LoadResStop 2
12. #Min Run Power
13. #NextStrt Del
14. #OverldNextDel
15. #NextStopDel
16. #SlowStopDel
17. RunHoursBase
18. #RunHrsMaxDiff
19. #PwrBnChngDlUp
20. #PwrBnChngDlDn
7.3.8 Setpoints – AMF Settings

SPtM only
1. EmergStart Del
2. MainsReturnDel
3. Mains >V
4. Mains <V
5. Mains V Del
6. Mains >Freq
7. Mains <Freq
8. Mains Freq Del
9. VectorShiftLim
10. Transfer Del
11. MCB Close Del
12. MCB Opens On
13. RetFromIsland
14. BreakerOverlap
15. ReturnFromTEST
NT
16. MCB Logic
7.3.9 Setpoints – Sync/Load Ctrl
1. Speed Gov Char

2. Speed Gov Bias
3. SpeedGovLowLim
4. SpeedGovHiLim
5. TauSpeedActuat
6. Voltage Window
7. Phase Window
8. Dwell Time
9. Freq Gain
10. Freq Int
11. Angle Gain
12. Load Ramp
13. Load Gain
14. Load Int
15. GCB Open Level
16. GCB Open Del
17. Sync Timeout
18. LoadShare Gain
19. LoadShare Int
7.3.10 Setpoints – Volt/PF Control
1. AVRi Bias
2. Voltage Gain
3. Voltage Int
4. PF Gain
5. PF Int
6. VAr Share Gain
7. VAr Share Int
7.3.11 Setpoints – ExtI/O Protect
1. IOM AI1 Yel

2. IOM AI1 Red
3. IOM AI1 Del
4. IOM AI2 Yel
5. IOM AI2 Red
6. IOM AI2 Del
7. IOM AI3 Yel
8. IOM AI3 Red
9. IOM AI3 Del
10. IOM AI4 Yel
11. IOM AI4 Red
12. IOM AI4 Del
7.3.12 Setpoints – SMS/E-Mail
1. Yel Alarm Msg

2. Red Alarm Msg
3. Event Msg
NT
4. TelNo/Addr Ch1
5. TelNo/Addr Ch2
7.3.13 Setpoints – AnalogSwitches
1. AnaSwitch1 ON
2. AnaSwitch1 OFF
3. AnaSwitch2 ON
4. AnaSwitch2 OFF
5. AnaSwitch3 ON
6. AnaSwitch3 OFF
7. PowerSwitch ON
8. PowerSwitch OFF
7.3.14 Setpoints – Date/Time
1. Time Stamp Per

2. #SummerTimeMod
3. #Time
4. #Date
5. Timer1 Repeat
6. Timer1 ON Time
7. Timer1Duration
8. Timer1 Function
9. Timer2 Repeat
10. Timer2 ON Time
11. Timer2Duration
12. Timer2 Function
7.3.15 Setpoints – Sensors Spec
1. AI1Calibration
2. AI2Calibration
3. AI3Calibration
4. IOM AI1 Calibr
5. IOM AI2 Calibr
6. IOM AI3 Calibr
7. IOM AI4 Calibr
NT
8 Values
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that
are intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into
groups according to their meaning.
NOTE:
A complete overview of all data objects available in the controller can be exported by LiteEdit into a
text file. Open any connection (also offline with a previously saved archive) and go to the menu
Controller -> Generate CFG image.
8.1 Invalid flag

If valid data is available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to
the following:
 The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
 Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
 The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
 The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in LiteEdit and on the controller screen. If
such a value is read out via Modbus, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and
65535 in the case of unsigned values.
8.2 Value groups

1. Engine
2. Generator
3. Mains
4. Bus
5. Pwr Management
6. Controller I/O
7. Extension I/O
8. Statistics
9. Date/Time
10. Info
8.2.1 Values – Engine
1. RPM
2. W-TerminalFreq
3. ECU State
4. Fuel Rate ECU
5. Cool Temp ECU
6. IntakeTemp ECU
7. Oil Press ECU
8. Oil Temp ECU
9. BoostPress ECU
10. Perc Load ECU
11. FuelLevel ECU
NT
12. ECU FreqSelect
13. Speed Request
14. SpeedReq RPM
15. DPF1 Soot Load
16. DPF1 Ash Load
8.2.2 Values – Generator
1. Gen kW
2. Gen kW L1
3. Gen kW L2
4. Gen kW L3
5. Gen kVAr
6. Gen kVAr L1
7. Gen kVAr L2
8. Gen kVAr L3
9. Gen kVA
10. Gen kVA L1
11. Gen kVA L2
12. Gen kVA L3
13. Gen PF
14. Gen Load char
15. Gen PF L1
16. Gen Lchr L1
17. Gen PF L2
18. Gen Lchr L2
19. Gen PF L3
20. Gen Lchr L3
21. Gen Freq
22. Gen V L1-N
23. Gen V L2-N
24. Gen V L3-N
25. Gen V L1-L2
26. Gen V L2-L3
27. Gen V L3-L1
28. Gen A L1
29. Gen A L2
30. Gen A L3
31. EarthFaultCurr
8.2.3 Values – Mains

SPtM only
1. Mains Freq
2. Mains V L1-N
3. Mains V L2-N
4. Mains V L3-N
5. Mains V L1-L2
6. Mains V L2-L3
7. Mains V L3-L1
8. Mains A L3/EF
9. Mains kW I
10. Mains kVAr I
11. Mains PF
12. Mains LChr
13. Load kW
14. Load kVAr
NT
15. Load PF
16. Load LChr
17. Slip
18. Angle
19. MaxVectorShift
8.2.4 Values – Bus

MINT only
1. Bus Freq
2. Bus V L1-N
3. Bus V L2-N
4. Bus V L3-N
5. Bus V L1-L2
6. Bus V L2-L3
7. Bus V L3-L1
8. Slip
9. Angle
8.2.5 Values – Pwr Management

MINT only
1. Actual Reserve
2. Running ActPwr
3. Running Q-Pwr
4. Running NomPwr
5. Avail Nom Pwr
6. Priority
7. Act Pwr Band
8. Next Pwr Band
8.2.6 Values – Controller I/O
1. Battery Volts
2. D+
3. Analog Input 1
4. Analog Input 2
5. Analog Input 3
6. Bin Inputs
7. Bin Outputs
8. Speed Gov Out
9. AVRi Output
10. GSM SignalLvl
11. GSM ErrorRate
12. GSM Diag Code
13. AirGate Diag
14. AirGate ID
15. Modem Status
8.2.7 Values – Extension I/O
1. IOM AI1
2. IOM AI2
3. IOM AI3
NT
4. IOM AI4
5. IOM Bin Inp
6. ExtM Bin Inp
7. RA Bin Out
8. IOM Bin Out
8.2.8 Values – Statistics
1. Energy kWh
2. Energy kVAhr
3. Run Hours
4. Num Starts
5. Maintenance
6. Num E-Stops
7. Shutdowns
8. TotFuelConsum
9. PerTotFuelCons
8.2.9 Values – Date/Time
1. Time
2. Date
8.2.10 Values – Info
1. Engine State
2. Breaker State
3. Timer Text
4. Timer Value
5. FW Version
6. FW Branch
7. PasswordDecode
8. CAN16
9. CAN32
10. GensLoaded16
11. GensLoaded32
NT
9 Binary input functions
The following functions can be configured to physical binary inputs (terminals) of the controller and/or
extension modules:
9.1 Common functions

1. GCB Feedback
2. MCB Feedback
3. Emergency Stop
4. Sd Override
5. Access Lock
6. Remote OFF
7. Remote MAN
8. Remote AUT
9. RemControlLock
10. Emergency MAN
11. Start Button
12. Stop Button
13. FaultResButton
14. HornResButton
15. GCB Button
16. ForwSyncDisabl
17. NeutralCB fdb
18. PerFuelConsRes
9.2 MINT specific

MINT only
1. Sys Start/Stop
2. Load Reserve 2
3. Min Run Power
4. Top Priority
9.3 SPtM specific

SPtM only
1. Rem Start/Stop
2. Remote TEST
3. Rem TEST OnLd
4. RevSyncDisable
5. MCB Button
6. Ext MF Relay
7. MainsFailBlock
NT
10 Binary output functions
10.1 Common functions

NOTE:
Learn more about wiring of binary outputs in the chapter Wiring of binary outputs.
1. Starter
2. Battery B
3. Fuel Solenoid
4. Stop Solenoid
5. Stop Pulse
6. Ignition
7. Prestart
8. Alarm
9. Horn
10. Fault Reset
11. GCB Close/Open
12. GCB ON Coil
13. GCB OFF Coil
14. GCB UV Coil
15. Speed Up
16. Speed Down
17. AVR Up
18. AVR Down
19. Ready To Load
20. Synchronizing
21. Running
22. Loaded
23. Unloading
24. AnalogSwitch 1
25. AnalogSwitch 2
26. AnalogSwitch 3
27. Ctrl HeartBeat
28. Gen Healthy
29. Yellow Alarm
30. Red Alarm
31. Mode OFF
32. Mode MAN
33. Mode AUT
34. Exerc Timer 1
35. Exerc Timer 2
36. Power Switch
37. Neutral CB C/O
38. Breaker Trip
39. kWh pulse
10.2 ECU info

1. ECU Comm OK
2. ECU Comm Error
3. ECU YellowLamp
4. ECU RedLamp
5. ECU PowerRelay
NT
10.3 Alarm mirrors
1. AL Gen Volts
2. AL Gen Freq
3. AL Overcurrent
4. AL Gen V,Freq
5. AL Overspeed
6. AL Underspeed
7. AL Overload
8. AL Reverse Pwr
9. AL Start Fail
10. AL Stop Fail
11. AL Sync Fail
12. AL Batt Volt
13. AL Earth Fault
14. BI1 Status
15. BI2 Status
16. BI3 Status
17. BI4 Status
18. BI5 Status
19. BI6 Status
20. BI7 Status
21. BI8 Status
22. BI9 Status
23. IOM BI1 Status
24. IOM BI2 Status
25. IOM BI3 Status
26. IOM BI4 Status
27. IOM BI5 Status
28. IOM BI6 Status
29. IOM BI7 Status
30. IOM BI8 Status
31. ExtBI 1 Status
32. ExtBI 2 Status
33. ExtBI 3 Status
34. ExtBI 4 Status
35. ExtBI 5 Status
36. ExtBI 6 Status
37. ExtBI 7 Status
38. ExtBI 8 Status
39. AL AI1 Yel
40. AL AI2 Yel
41. AL AI3 Yel
42. AL AI1 Red
43. AL AI2 Red
44. AL AI3 Red
45. AL IOM AI1 Yel
46. AL IOM AI2 Yel
47. AL IOM AI3 Yel
48. AL IOM AI4 Yel
49. AL IOM AI1 Red
50. AL IOM AI2 Red
51. AL IOM AI3 Red
52. AL IOM AI4 Red
53. AL Common Wrn
54. AL Common Sd
55. AL Common Stp
56. AL Common BOC
57. AL Common Fls
58. AL Exct Loss
NT
10.4 MINT specific
MINT only
1. Bus Healthy
2. System Ready
3. SystReserve OK
4. EnginesSwapped
10.5 SPtM specific

SPtM only
1. MCB Close/Open
2. MCB ON Coil
3. MCB OFF Coil
4. MCB UV Coil
5. Ready To AMF
6. Mains Healthy
7. Mains Fail
8. Mode TEST
NT
11 Communication
For details about communication with extension modules and EFI equipped engines, see the
appropriate chapters in this manual.
More detailed information about all topics regarding communications is available in the document Inteli
Communication Guide, which is regularly updated and can be downloaded from the website
www.comap.cz.
11.1 Direct cable connection

An external communication module is necessary to enable direct cable connection to a PC. The
module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. Find more information about
installation of the modules in a separate chapter.
A RS232, USB or RS485 interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC. The setpoint
COM1 Mode or COM2 Mode (according to the interface used) must be set to DIRECT position for this
kind of connection.
CROSS-WIRED
RS232 RS232
IL-NT RS232 RS232 CABLE
IL-NT RS232-485
Physical COM Port
RS485 RS485 CABLE RS485

IL-NT RS232-485
Physical COM Port
CROSSED-WIRED
RS232 RS232 CABLE USB
RS232
IL-NT RS232
USB
Virtual COM Port
Shielded USB „A“

USB USB
cable
IL-NT S-USB
Virtual COM Port
DIRECT CABLE CONNECTION TYPES

The following modules are available for direct connection to a PC:
1. IL-NT RS232
2. IL-NT RS232-485
3. IL-NT S-USB (USB easily removable service module)
The RS232 or USB interface uses COM1 port of the controller. The RS485 uses COM2.
NOTE:
Use a cross-wired serial communication cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND
for a RS232 connection.
NT
11.2 Modem connection
A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via modems. Either an analog, GSM or ISDN
modem must be connected to the RS232 interface and the setpoint COM1 Mode must be set to
MODEM.
Ethernet
IL-NT RS232 RS232
LAN / WAN / RJ45
IL-NT RS232-485
GSM INTERNET
MODEM
BTS / Mobile
provider
OR
IL-NT RS232 RS232

IL-NT RS232-485
GSM GSM
MODEM MODEM
Ethernet
IL-NT RS232 RS232 LAN / WAN / RJ45
IL-NT RS232-485 INTERNET
ANALOG
MODEM
OR
IL-NT RS232 RS232

IL-NT RS232-485
ANALOG ANALOG
MODEM MODEM
MODEM CONNECTION TYPES

The following modules can be used for a modem connection to a PC:
1. IL-NT RS232
2. IL-NT RS232-485
The RS232 interface uses COM1 port of the controller.

If you have trouble with modem communication, an additional initialization string may be required. This
may be due to, for example, a national telephone network-specific feature. Use the setpoint
ModemIniString to add the necessary AT commands which will be sent to the modem during the
initialization. See the documentation of the modem for details.
NOTE:
Use the same kind of modem (e.g. analog, GSM or ISDN) as used on the controller also on the PC
side.
11.2.1 Recommended GSM modems
 Siemens/Cinterion M20, TC35, TC35i, ES75, MC39 (baud rate 9600 bps)
 Wavecom M1200/WMOD2 (baud rate 9600 bps)
 Wavecom Maestro 20
 Wavecom Fastrack M1306B (Fastrack M1206B is not recommended)
 Falcom A2D
NT
11.2.2 Modem setup procedure
Analog modems obviously do not require any setup. The only case in which setup could be necessary
is if the modem has been bought in a country with a telephony system different than the target country
where the modem will be used.
GSM modems need to be set up prior to using them with the controller. Use the gm_setup program
(installed together with LiteEdit) to perform initial setup of the modem. See the latest Inteli
Communication Guide (available on the ComAp web site) for details. The setup must be done while a
SIM card is inserted.
NOTE:
It is always recommended to use modems bought in and approved for the target country.
11.3 Internet connection

A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via Ethernet (internet, intranet). An appropriate
Ethernet communication module must be used.
11.3.1 SPtM
Use a plug-in communication module IB-Lite or IL-NT-GPRS to connect to the IC-NT SPtM controller
via the internet. The setpoint COM1 Mode must be set to the DIRECT position.
Ethernet CROSS-WIRED Ethernet

RJ45 ETHERNET CABLE RJ45
IB-Lite
Static IP
Ethernet Ethernet
RJ45 LAN / WAN / RJ45
IB-Lite
INTERNET
Static (Public) IP
Ethernet
LAN / WAN / RJ45
IL-NT GPRS
INTERNET
Static (Public) IP BTS / Mobile

provider
Ethernet
RJ45
IB-Lite
LAN / WAN /
Non-static non-public IP
Only AirGate ID
INTERNET
(controller nickname) Ethernet
RJ45
LAN / WAN /
IL-NT GPRS
INTERNET
Non-static non-public IP BTS / Mobile

Only AirGate ID Ethernet
provider
(controller nickname) RJ45
INTERNET CONNECTION FOR SINGLE CONTROLLER
NT
11.3.2 MINT
Use a plug-in communication module IB-Lite or IL-NT-GPRS on each controller for connecting to IC-
NT MINT controllers via the internet. The setpoint COM1 Mode must be set to the DIRECT position.
Ethernet CROSS-WIRED Ethernet

RJ45 ETHERNET CABLE RJ45
IB-Lite
Static (Public) IP (a) LAN / WAN /

CAN
INTERNET
Ethernet
RJ45
IB-Lite
Static (Public) IP (b)
IL-NT GPRS
Static (Public) IP (a)

CAN
Ethernet
LAN / WAN / RJ45
INTERNET
IL-NT GPRS
BTS / Mobile
provider
Static (Public) IP (b)
Ethernet
RJ45
IB-Lite
LAN / WAN /
CAN
Only AirGate ID
(controller nickname) INTERNET
Ethernet Ethernet
IB-Lite RJ45 RJ45
Only AirGate ID
IL-NT GPRS
CAN
Only AirGate ID
LAN / WAN /
INTERNET
IL-NT GPRS
BTS / Mobile Ethernet
Non-static non-public IP provider RJ45
Only AirGate ID
CAN
or
IB-NT
Eth
BTS / Mobile
provider LAN / WAN /
INTERNET
Only AirGate ID
Ethernet
RJ45
CAN
INTERNET CONNECTION FOR MULTIPLE CONTROLLERS
NT
11.3.3 Using a web browser
The IB-Lite module with firmware version 1.1 and above makes it possible to use any web browser for
basic monitoring and adjustment of the controller. Direct your web browser to the IP address of the
module, e.g. http://192.168.1.254 and then enter the access code.
11.3.4 IB-Lite setup procedure

NOTE:
Setting the module up requires a certain familiarity with network administration. Ask your IT specialist
for assistance.
The default settings of the module are IP = 192.168.1.254, Netmask = 255.255.255.0 and
Gateway = 192.168.1.1. The default password for service webpages is “comap” (or “0”).
To restore the default settings, close the “restore default setting” jumper located on the module before
switching the controller on and remove it few seconds after the controller has been switched on.
NOTE:
The default settings can be changed directly from the controller panel by pressing the “Page” button
and using ▼, ▲ and “Enter” to get to the “Comms Settings” menu (THIS APPLIES TO FIRMWARE VERSIONS
1.3 AND HIGHER).
11.3.4.1 Configuration
1. Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
2. Connect the module into your Ethernet network. If the default address does not match local
network parameters (i.e. the network segment does not use the IP range 192.168.1.xxx or the
IP 192.168.1.254 is occupied), connect the module directly to your PC using a cross-wired
cable. See details in the Installation chapter.
3. If you are connected directly, you have to change temporarily the IP address and subnet mask
of your PC Ethernet connection. Use the following settings: DHCP disabled, IP from the range
192.168.1.1 – 192.168.1.253 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0. After the IB-Lite setup is
finished, restore your PC setting back to the original values.
4. Start a web browser and direct it to http://192.168.1.254/sp_config.htm.
5. After a successful login the configuration page will be displayed.
6. It is recommended to change the user name and password and keep the new values
confidential.
7. Consult your IT specialist for proper IP settings.
8. Consult your e-mail provider for proper e-mail settings. Note that also most public SMTP
servers require authentication and e-mails must be sent from an existing address.
9. If you want to enable access only for clients with a specified IP address, tick the checkbox
“Trusted clients” and fill-in the allowed IP addresses.
NOTE:
See also the latest LiteEdit Reference Guide (available on the ComAp web site) for more information
about IB-Lite setup.
11.3.4.2 Firmware upgrade
1. Follow steps 1–3 of the configuration procedure above.

2. Start a web browser and direct it to http://192.168.1.254/sp_fw_upld.htm.
3. After a successful login the configuration page will be displayed.
4. Press the button “Browse” and select the appropriate firmware file.
5. Press “Upload new firmware” button. After the firmware upload is finished, the module will
restart.
NOTE:
Interrupting the upload will NOT cause any damage. Just repeat the upload again.
NT
11.3.5 System integration
The controller can be integrated into a building management or similar system using an RS232,
RS485 or Ethernet interface and MODBUS protocol. The following modules can be used for this
purpose:
1. IL-NT RS232
2. IL-NT RS232-485
3. IB-Lite (Modbus/TCP)
The setpoint COM1 Mode (RS232) resp. COM2 Mode (RS485, Ethernet) must be set to the MODBUS
position. The speed of MODBUS communication for RS232 and RS485 can be adjusted by the
setpoint ModbusCommSpeed. See a more detailed description of the MODBUS protocol in a separate
chapter.
NOTE:
The controller is able to detect IB-Lite module and performs automatic configuration. Related setpoints
COM1 Mode = DIRECT; COM2 Mode = MODBUS; ModbusCommSpeed = 57600 (THIS APPLIES TO
FIRMWARE VERSIONS 2.0 AND HIGHER).
11.3.6 InternetBridge-NT setup procedure

See the latest InternetBridge-NT Reference Guide for the information on how to set up the IB-NT
module.
11.3.7 IG-IB setup procedure

See the latest InteliCommunicationGuide for the information on how to set up the IG-IB module.
11.3.8 SNMP
Support for Simple Network Management Protocol was implemented. To generate MIB table go to
LiteEdit 4.6 or higher and use “Controller” -> “Generate Cfg image” -> “Generate SNMP MIB table”.
11.3.9 AirGate
technology for easy plug-and-play wireless communication is incorporated into the product. An
ordinary SIM card with GPRS service is suitable for this system. This overcomes problems with the
necessity for a special SIM card (fixed and public IP), firewalls and difficult communication settings.
http://www.comap.cz/news-room/news-and-events/detail/AirGate
http://www.comap.cz/news-room/news-and-events/detail/The-Rainbow-rises-for-remotemonitoring-
applications/
11.3.10 Locate
The controller supports the technology for GSM localization using an IL-NT-GPRS
communication module. It is possible to view the localization in WebSupervisor.
NT
11.4 Modbus protocol
The Modbus protocol can be activated on the RS232 or RS485 port. The physical link parameters are:
 8 data bits
 1 stop bit
 no parity
 communication speed selectable by the setpoint ModbusComSpeed
The Modbus/TCP protocol uses the TCP/IP frames as the transport layer for Modbus frames. This
protocol is available via the IB-Lite module on port 502.
The following features from the Modbus specification are supported:
 Transfer mode RTU

 Function 3 (Read Multiple Registers)
 Function 6 (Write Single Register)
 Function 16 (Write Multiple Registers)
The response to an incoming message depends on the communication speed. The delay is not
shorter than the time needed to send/receive 3.5 characters. See the latest Inteli Communication
Guide (available on the ComAp website) for details and examples.
The complete description of the Modbus communication protocol can be found in the Modbus Protocol
Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 and Open Modbus Specification Release 1.0. Both documents are
available on the web.
NOTE:
The complete list of available registers can be obtained from LiteEdit. Open an online connection to
the controller or open offline an archive and go to the menu Controller -> Generate Cfg image to get
the register list.
CAUTION!
Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing of baseload
setpoint via Modbus) The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be overwritten up to
5
10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when the allowed number
of writing cycles is exceeded!
NT
11.5 IC-NT-RD Remote display software
NT
IC-NT-RD is remote display software for an InteliCompact controller. Remote display provides the
same control and monitoring functions as controller itself (except limitations given by HW differences
between remote display and controller). Remote display for IC-NT controllers uses standard IL-NT
controller platform with IC-NT Remote display software. No further programming of the display is
required – unit is self configurable from the main controller. It is connected with the controller via
IL-NT-RS232 communication modules using RS232 line. Longer distances (up to 1200m) are possible
using IL-NT-RS232-485 communication module or when RS232/RS485 converters are used.
NOTE:
In case of IL-NT-AMF25 HW only Bus under voltage LED (indicating if the bus is under voltage or
not/if the Load is supplied or not) is missing. This information is anyway given by combination of GCB
and MCB position LEDs placed on the right and left side next to the Bus under voltage LED.
The other IL-NT hardware types have other limitations according to HW variations from IC-NT HW.
HINT:
IC-NT RD SW works analogically to IL-NT RD SW. See IC-NT RD SW website to find out more
information about installation and configuration.
NT
12 Maintenance
12.1 Backup battery replacement

The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 10 years. Replace the battery if the alarm Low
BackupBatt occurs. Follow these instructions:
1. Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes.

2. Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
3. Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or other suitable tool.
4. Remove all plug-in modules.

5. The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small
sharp screwdriver and push the new battery into the holder with your finger. Use only a
CR1225 lithium battery.
NT
6. Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Ensure that
the cover is in the correct position and not upside down!
7. Plug the modules back into the slots.
8. Power the controller on, adjust the date and time and check all setpoints.
NOTE:
NT
When the internal RTC battery is drained, the InteliCompact function (e.g. Ready for standby) does
not change until the controller power supply is switched off. After the next power switch on (with
drained battery already), the controller will:
- Stay in the INIT state (not possible to run gen-set)

- All History records disappear except for the “System log: SetpointCS err” record
- Time and Date values are set to zero
- Statistics values are random
NT
13 Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM
The unit is dark, no display, no LEDs are lit.
CAUSE SOLUTION
There is no power on the power terminals. Check the power supply voltage.
The boot-jumper is inserted. Remove the boot-jumper.
SYMPTOM
No display, only the backlight is on.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Press the PAGE button five times, then press
and hold the ENTER button and together press
Extremely low display contrast.
and hold the UP button until display shows
correctly.
Not valid firmware in the controller. This
situation can occur if the previous programming Reprogram the firmware using the boot-jumper.
of the firmware was interrupted.
SYMPTOM
The unit shows “Configuration table error” and does not work.
CAUSE SOLUTION
The controller does not contain a valid
configuration. This situation can occur if
Reprogram the configuration.
previous programming of the configuration was
interrupted.
SYMPTOM
The unit shows “INIT” and does not work, controller mode cannot be changed. This
situation occurs after controller reset if the checksum of setpoints is not correct.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Use LiteEdit online connected to the controller
to check all setpoints and correct the wrong
ones. You have to change at least one setpoint.
New firmware containing new setpoints has
If all setpoints are correct, change one of them
been programmed.
back to the original value to recalculate the
checksum. Then use the LiteEdit command
Controller -> Reset from init state.
Replace the battery as described in the
Maintenance chapter. Then proceed with
LiteEdit as described in the previous situation.
The RTC backup battery is empty.
An alternative way is checking all setpoints from
the front panel. Change at least one of them
and then switch the controller off and on.
NT
SYMPTOM
You do not know the password.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Display the information screen containing the
serial number and the password decode
number as described in the chapter Controller
You’ve probably forgotten it. information screen. Write down both numbers
and send a request to retrieve the password to
your local distributor containing these two
numbers.
SYMPTOM
The controller does not respond to mode buttons on the front panel.
CAUSE SOLUTION
The mode is forced by one of remote mode Deactivate all remote mode inputs to be able to
inputs. change the mode from the front panel.
The input Access Lock is active. Deactivate the input.
The setpoint ControllerMode is password-
Enter the password prior to changing the mode.
protected.
SYMPTOM
The controller does not respond to the START, STOP or breaker buttons on the front
panel.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Switch the controller into MAN mode. Read
The controller is not in MAN mode.
more in the Operating modes chapter.
The gen-set cannot be started if any red alarm
is active. The GCB cannot be closed until the
The conditions needed for start or for closing of
gen-set is running and the generator voltage
the breakers are not fulfilled.
and frequency are within limits. More in the
Stabilization chapter.
SYMPTOM
It is not possible to change setpoints.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Some setpoints can be configured as protected Enter the password prior going to change
by password. protected setpoints
The binary input Access Lock is active. Switch the Access lock off.
SYMPTOM
Incorrect kW and power factor reading, but correct voltage and current readings.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Wrong wiring of voltage and/or current
measurements. I.e. the voltage connected to L1
Correct the wiring to fit all phases of the voltage
voltage terminal is not the same generator
to their CTs.
phase as the CT connected to L1 current
terminal or the same situation for L2 or L3.
NT
SYMPTOM
Governor output does not work; the output level is continuously at the lower or upper
limit.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Wrong (opposite) position of the setpoint Speed Check the setpoint position if it fits the Governor
Gov Char. requirements.
Opposite or wrong wiring of the Governor/AVRi
Check and correct the wiring.
output.
The governor output is switched to PWM mode Put the PWM jumper at the governor output into
but the governor needs voltage mode or vice the proper position according to the Governor
versa. requirements.
SYMPTOM
The cranking is cut off too early, the engine does not start.
CAUSE SOLUTION
Adjust the setpoint to a higher pressure level
than can be achieved by cranking only. Note,
The setpoint Starting Oil P is adjusted too low.
that under cold condition the oil pressure
achieved during cranking can be higher.
Disconnect the W terminal from the pickup
W terminal is connected to the pickup input of
input, then start the gen-set in manual mode
the controller, but autodetection of frequency-to-
and wait until the gen-set is ready to take the
speed ratio was not performed (e.g. if the
load. Then stop the engine and connect the W
controller was previously used with another
terminal back. The autodetection process will
engine with another charging alternator).
be performed during next start.
SYMPTOM
The MCB control does not work properly, the alarm MCB fail is present all the time.
CAUSE SOLUTION
The position of the setpoint MCB Logic does not Switch the setpoint MCB Logic into proper
match the current MCB wiring. position.
SYMPTOM
The communication via CAN bus with other engines, extension units or ECU does not
work, i.e. you do not see other engines in the CAN16 or CAN32 value or the controller
shows an alarm in the Alarmlist that some of extension units or ECU does not
communicate.
CAUSE SOLUTION
The wiring of the CAN bus network is not Correct the wiring as described in the chapter
provided as linear bus without nodes. CAN bus wiring.
NT
14 Technical data
14.1 Power supply
Power supply range 8–36 V DC

Power supply drop-out
50ms (from min. 10 V)
immunity
Power consumption approx. 200 mA / 8 V; 50 mA / 36 V
Peak power consumption
approx. 0.56 A / 8 V; 1.8 A / 36 V
(LT)
Backup battery type CR 1225
Estimated backup battery
10 years
lifetime
14.2 Operating conditions
Operating temperature -20–70 °C

Operating temperature (LT
-40–70 °C
version)
Operating humidity 95% non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30)
Protection degree (front
IP65
panel)
Vibration 5-25 Hz, +/- 1.6 mm; 25-100 Hz, a = 4 g
2
Shocks amax 200 m/s
Storage temperature -30–80 °C
14.3 Physical dimensions
Dimensions 185x125x60 mm (WxHxD)

Weight
Mounting cutout size 175x115 mm (WxH)
14.4 Standard conformity
Electromagnetic
EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4
compatibility
Low voltage directive EN 61010-1:95 +A1:97
NT
14.5 Binary inputs
Number of binary inputs 9

Galvanic insulation Not insulated
Common pole Positive, Vs = 8–36 V DC
Closed contact voltage <2 V
Open contact voltage 4 V - Vs
14.6 Binary outputs
Number of binary outputs 8

Type Transistor, switching to negative supply terminal
Operating voltage 8–36 V DC
Switching current 500 mA (suppression diodes required for inductive loads)
Total current 2 A (overall current for all binary outputs)
14.7 Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 3

Electrical range 0–2500 Ω
Resolution 10 bits, 4 digits
Predefined: VDO 10Bar, VDO Temperature, VDO Fuel level
Supported sensor types User-defined: 10 points non-linear sensors can be defined by the
user
Precision 1% from the range
14.8 Generator/Mains measurements
Measurement inputs 3ph generator voltage, 3ph generator current, 3ph mains voltage
Measurement type True RMS
Voltage range 480 V Ph-Ph (277 V Ph-N)
Max. measured voltage 340 V Ph-N
Voltage accuracy 1% from the range
Current range 5A
Max. measured current 9A
Max. allowed current 12 A continuous, 50 A/1
Current accuracy 2% from the range
NT
CT input burden <0.5 VA
Frequency range 30-70 Hz, measured from L3
Frequency accuracy 0.05 Hz
14.9 Pickup input
Input voltage 2–70 Vpp

Frequency range 4 Hz–10 kHz (min 2 Vpp @ 4 kHz, 6 Vpp @ 10 kHz)
Accuracy 0.2%
14.10 Charging alternator pre-excitation circuit
Excitation current 200 mA, during the engine start only

Charging fail threshold 80% of Usupply
14.11 AVR output
Output type 5 V PWM, designed for IG-AVRi interface module

Galvanic insulation Not insulated, insulation is provided by IG-AVRi module
14.11.1 IG-AVRi module

Power supply 18 V AC from IG-AVRi Trans/LV or IG-AVRi Trans/100
Max. power supply range 15–25 V AC or 20–35V DC
Inputs -AVR, -AVR (two wires, PWM from IC-NT)
Outputs OUT1, OUT2 floating (potential free) voltage source
AVRi output voltage range Potentiometer adjustable from ±1 V to ±10 V DC
AVRi output current max 15 mA
Mechanical dimensions 96 x 27 x 43 mm, DIN rail (35 mm) mounted
14.11.2 IG-AVRi Trans/LV

Primary voltage 1 230–277 V AC
Absolute low limit 1 230 V AC – 20%
Absolute high limit 1 277 V AC + 20%
Primary voltage 2 400–480 V AC
Absolute low limit 2 400 V AC – 20%
Absolute high limit 2 480 V AC + 20%
Frequency 50–60 Hz
Secondary voltage 18 V AC, 5 VA
NT
Operating temperature -30..+70 °C
14.11.3 IG-AVRi Trans/100

Primary voltage 100–120 V AC
Absolute low limit 100 V AC - 20%
Absolute high limit 120 V AC + 20%
Frequency 50–60 Hz
Secondary voltage 18 V AC
Operating temperature -30..+70 °C
14.12 Governor output
0–10 V analog or 5 V @ 500 Hz PWM, selectable by jumper. Serial

Output type
resistor 10 kΩ shortable by jumper
14.13 Remote communication interface
RS232 Optional using the plug-in module IL-NT RS232, D-SUB9M socket
Optional using the plug-in module IL-NT RS232-485, plug-in
RS485
terminal block
Baud rate Depending on selected mode (up to 57600 bps)
USB Optional using the plug-in module IL-NT S-USB
Ethernet Optional using the plug-in module IB-Lite
14.14 Extension modules interface
Type CAN bus

Galvanic insulation Insulated, 500 V
Baud rate 250 kbps
Bus length max. 200 m
Termination resistor 120 Ω, built-in, jumper activated
14.15 Interface to other controllers
Type CAN bus, available in MINT type only

Galvanic insulation Insulated, 500 V
Baud rate 250 kbps
Bus length max. 200 m
NT
Termination resistor 120 Ω, built-in, jumper activated
14.15.1 Recommended CAN cables
 Belden 3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet

 Belden 3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
 Belden 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
 Lapp Cable Unitronic Bus DeviceNet Trunk Cable
 Lapp Cable Unitronic Bus DeviceNet Drop Cable
 Lapp Cable Unitronic Bus CAN
 Lapp Cable Unitronic-FD Bus P CAN UL/CSA
NT
15 Language support
The controller contains memory slots for 2 languages. English and Chinese are provided in the default
archives. The languages can be changed in the LiteEdit software using dictionaries. There are two
types of dictionaries:
 Default dictionaries are distributed together with the controller firmware.

 Custom dictionaries are created by the user during the translation process.
The custom dictionary is used for storing translations that were made by the user because there was
no default dictionary for the particular language, the default dictionary was incomplete or the user
simply wishes to have different translations. For more information about languages and translations,
see the LiteEdit help.
It is possible to create any language using a code page supported by the controller:
 Win 1250 – Middle Europe

 Win 1251 – Eastern Europe (Cyrillic)
 Win 1252 – Western Europe, America
 Win 1254 – Turkish
 GB2312 – Chinese
NOTE:
See the Operator guide for information on how to select the controller front panel language.
NT
16 Appendix
16.1 Table of setpoints
16.1.1 Group: Process Control
16.1.1.1 Setpoint: Baseload

Group Process Control
Range [units] 0 … Nominal power [kW]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Required gen-set load in parallel to mains operation.
16.1.1.2 Setpoint: Base PF

Range [units] 0.7 ... 1.0 [-]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Required gen-set power factor when the gen-set is running parallel to the
mains.
16.1.1.3 Setpoint: AMFStartEnable

Range [units] NO, YES [-]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Use this setpoint to enable or disable the AMF operation.
16.1.1.4 Setpoint: Export Limit

Group ProcessControl
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Tells controller to activate protection against power export to the Mains. The
function limits gen-set requested power to hold export power lower or equal
to the setpoint Export kW.
NT
16.1.1.5 Setpoint: Export kW
Range [units] -32000 … 32000 [kW]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Defines max limit for export/import in case Export Limit setpoint is set to
ENABLED. A negative value means import limit, a positive value export limit,
zero means no export/import.
16.1.1.6 Setpoint: #SysLdCtrl PtM

Range [units] BASELOAD, LDSHARING [-]

Related MINT
applications
Description Load control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole group of gen-
sets.
BASELOAD: The total power of the group is controlled to constant level
given by the setpoint #SysBaseLoad. Each loaded gen-set takes equal part
(relative to their nominal power) from this requested value. The load is
regulated locally in each controller by Load control regulation loop, load-
sharing is not active. The setpoint #Sys base load is also used for
determining which gen-sets have to run or not.
LDSHARING: Gen-sets load is controlled by MainsCompact controller to
share the total load (given by the setpoint #SysBaseLoad) with other loaded
gen-sets in such a way, that all loaded gen-sets will be loaded at the same
level (relative to gen-set nominal power). Load-sharing regulation loop is
active.
NOTE:
The LOADSHARING mode shall be used in case a MainsCompact controller
is present in the system. In systems without MainsCompact the setpoint must
be in the BASELOAD position.
NOTE:
The power factor (PF) is regulated to constant level given by the setpoint
#SysPwrFactor in parallel to mains operation and does not depend on active
load control mode.
16.1.1.7 Setpoint: #SysBaseLoad

Range [units] 0 ... 4000 [kW]

Related MINT
applications
Description Required total load of the gen-set group in parallel to mains operation in
baseload mode (setpoint #SysLdCtrl PtM = BASELOAD).
NT
16.1.1.8 Setpoint: #SysPwrFactor
Range [units] 0.7 ... 1.0 [-]

Related MINT
applications
Description Required gen-set power factor when the group of gen-sets is running parallel
to the mains. The PF is regulated locally in each controller by PF control
regulation loop, VARsharing is not active.
16.1.1.9 Setpoint: Synchro Enable

Range [units] NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE, BOTH [-]

Related All
applications
Description Enables or disables forward/reverse synchronization (according to SPtM /
MINT versions).
NONE No synchronizing is enabled. (SPtM and MINT)

FORWARD GCB synchronizing is enabled. (SPtM and MINT)
REVERSE MCB synchronizing is enabled. (SPtM)
BOTH GCB and MCB synchronizing are enabled. (SPtM)
16.1.1.10 Setpoint: PeakLevelStart

Range [units] PeakLevelStop ... 32000 [kW]

Related SPtM
applications
Description Load consumption level the gen-set has to start at. Function is inactive when
PeakAutS/S Del = OFF. Gen-set start is “PeakAutS/S Del” delayed after the
consumption of the Load exceeds the PeakLevelStart limit.
NOTE:
The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format
(see the LiteEdit manual).
NOTE:
It is necessary to use IC-NT CT-BIO7 module and measure 1Ph Mains
current.
NT
16.1.1.11 Setpoint: PeakLevelStop
Range [units] 0 ... PeakLevelStart [kW]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Load consumption level the gen-set has to stop at. Gen-set stop is
“PeakAutS/S Del” delayed after PeakLevelStop limit is reached. Load
consumption is calculated (not directly measured) as a sum of gen-set and
mains active power.
NOTE:
The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format
(see LiteEdit manual).
NOTE:
It is necessary to use IC-NT CT-BIO7 module and measure 1Ph Mains
current.
16.1.1.12 Setpoint: PeakAutS/S del

Range [units] 0 (OFF) ... 600 [s]
Related SPtM
applications
Description The condition for the “peak” automatic start or stop must be valid for a period
longer than the value of this setpoint to execute the automatic start or stop.
Adjusting to “0” causes stop of the gen-set (if there is no other demand for
running) and disables the automatic peak shaving start.
NT
16.1.1.13 Setpoint: #Neutral cont
Range [units] EACH, COMMON [-]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Setpoint changes behaviour of binary output Neutral CB C/O which is used
for Neutral contactor control.
EACH:
- When GCB is opened (after start, before stop):
o Neutral contactor closes when Generator voltage is higher than
85% of Nominal voltage.
o Neutral contactor opens when Generator voltage is lower than
50% of Nominal voltage.
- When multiple gen-sets are connected to the bus and MCB is opened
(island running group) the Neutral contactor is closed on the running gen-
set with the lowest Contr. address only. When a lower controller address
gen-set is connected to the bus, the Neutral contactor connection
changes.
- Neutral contactor is opened when gen-sets are running in parallel to the
mains.
COMMON:
- When MCB is opened Neutral contactor closes when at least one
Generator voltage from the group (at least one phase) is higher than 86%
of Nominal voltage.
- When MCB is opened, the Neutral contactor opens when all phases of all
gen-set voltages are lower than 50% of Nominal voltage.
- When MCB is closed, the Neutral contactor opens.
NOTE:
Configure BO: Neutral CB C/O and BI: NeutralCB fdb prior to Neutral
contactor function is used.
16.1.2 Group: Basic Settings
16.1.2.1 Setpoint: ControllerName

Group Basic Settings
Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description User-defined name, used for controller identification at remote connections.
The name can be max. 15 characters long and must be entered using
LiteEdit.
NOTE:
The setpoint can't be changed from the front panel of the controller.
NT
16.1.2.2 Setpoint: Nominal Power
Related All
applications
Description Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator overload protection is based on this
setpoint.
16.1.2.3 Setpoint: Nomin Current

Range [units] 1 ... 10000 [A]
Related All
applications
Description This is the current limit for the generator. Generator short current and
generator overcurrent alarms are based on this setpoint.
16.1.2.4 Setpoint: CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 ... 10000 [A/5A]
Related All
applications
Description Gen-set current transformers ratio.
16.1.2.5 Setpoint: EF CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 ... 10000 [A/5A]
Related MINT
applications
Description Defines current transformer ratio for current measuring input of IC-NT CT-
BIO7 extension module if used.
16.1.2.6 Setpoint: Im/EF CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 ... 10000 [A/5A]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Defines mains current transformer ratio for current measuring input of IC-NT
CT-BIO7 extension module if used.
NT
16.1.2.7 Setpoint: Im/EF input
Range [units] Mains, EarthFltC [-]
Related SPtM
applications
Description This setpoint is relevant only in case IC-NT CT-BIO7 module is used. It is
then used for switching between Mains current measurement and Earth Fault
Current protection depending on the purpose of IC-NT CT-BIO7 usage.
16.1.2.8 Setpoint: Nominal Volts

Range [units] 80 ... 20000 [V]
Related All
applications
Description Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral)
16.1.2.9 Setpoint: PT Ratio

Range [units] 0.1 ... 500 [V/V]
Related All
applications
Description Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the
setpoint to 1.
16.1.2.10 Setpoint: Vm PT Ratio

Range [units] 0.1 ... 500 [V/V]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the
setpoint to 1.
16.1.2.11 Setpoint: Vb PT Ratio

Range [units] 0.1 ... 500 [V/V]
Related MINT
applications
Description Bus voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the
setpoint to 1.
NT
16.1.2.12 Setpoint: Nominal Freq
Range [units] 45 ... 65 [Hz]
Related All
applications
Description Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60Hz).
16.1.2.13 Setpoint: Nominal RPM

Range [units] 100 ... 4000 [RPM]
Related All
applications
Description Nominal engine speed.
16.1.2.14 Setpoint: Gear Teeth

Range [units] 0 (OFF) ... 500 [-]
Related All
applications
Description Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to
zero if no pick-up is used and the Engine speed will be counted from the
generator frequency.
NOTE:
If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible
overcranking, which can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is
not present immediately after exceeding firing speed.
16.1.2.15 Setpoint: ControllerMode

Range [units] OFF, MAN, AUT, (TEST) [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint can be used for changing the operating mode remotely, e.g. via
Modbus. Use the mode selector on the main screen for changing the mode
from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control window for changing
the mode from LiteEdit.
NT
16.1.2.16 Setpoint: Reset To MAN
Related All
applications
Description If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN
mode when there is a red alarm in the alarm list and fault reset is pressed.
This is a safety function that prevents the gen-set starting again automatically
if the gen-set is stopped due to a red alarm, the alarm is no longer active and
fault reset is pressed.
16.1.2.17 Setpoint: Backlight time

Range [units] 0 – 240 [min]
Related MINT
applications
Description Function will switch off the screen backlight after preset number of minutes.
Pressing any button on the controller or automatic start of the gen-set (e.g.
due to power management) will switch the backlight back on.
Default value is 15 minutes. It is possible to switch the function off by setting
0 (backlight will be on all the time).
16.1.3 Group: Comms Settings
16.1.3.1 Setpoint: ControllerAddr

Group Comms Settings
Range [units] 1 ... 32(8) [-]
Related All
applications
Description Unique identification number of a controller within a group of controllers
which are connected together via CAN2 bus (MINT, MC) or RS485 bus
(SPtM).
NOTE:
Adjust the controller address to 1 if you have SPtM application and no other
controllers are connected to the RS485 bus.
NOTE:
Do not use the same address for multiple controllers in the same group!
NOTE:
Use the proper address when connecting to the controller from LiteEdit.
NOTE:
Changing the address remotely (e.g. from LiteEdit) will cause connection
loss!
NT
16.1.3.2 Setpoint: COM1 Mode
Range [units] DIRECT, MODEM, MODBUS, ECU LINK [-]
Related All
applications
Description Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.
 DIRECT: ComAp PC SW communication protocol via direct cable.

 MODEM: ComAp PC SW communication protocol via modem.
 MODBUS: Modbus protocol. Find a detailed description in a separate
chapter.
 ECU LINK: Protocol for communication with EFI engines via Modbus.
16.1.3.3 Setpoint: COM2 Mode

Range [units] DIRECT, MODBUS, ECU LINK [-]
Related All
applications
Description Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.
 DIRECT: ComAp PC SW communication protocol via direct cable.

 MODBUS: Modbus protocol. Find a detailed description in a separate
chapter.
 ECU LINK: Protocol for communication with EFI engines via Modbus.
16.1.3.4 Setpoint: ModemIniString

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description If your modem needs additional initialization AT commands (i.e. because of
national telephony network differences), they can be entered here. Otherwise
leave this setpoint blank.
16.1.3.5 Setpoint: ModbusComSpeed

Range [units] 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 [bps]
Related All
applications
Description If the Modbus mode is selected on COM1 or COM2 channels, the Modbus
communication speed can be adjusted here.
NT
16.1.3.6 Setpoint: CAN Bus Mode
Range [units] 32C, 8C [-]
Related MINT
applications
Description CAN bus speed selection.
 32C: High speed CAN (250 kbps) applicable for up to 32 controllers,

CAN bus length limited to 200 meters.
 8C: Low speed CAN (50 kbps) applicable for up to 8 controllers, CAN
bus length limited to 900 meters.
NOTE:
Use low speed for a long-distance connection only. Set all connected
controllers to the same speed.
16.1.3.7 Setpoint: IBLite IP Addr

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the
Ethernet interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this
setting.
If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the IP address, which

has been assigned by the DHCP server.
16.1.3.8 Setpoint: IBLite NetMask

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Ethernet interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this
setting.
If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the IP address, which
has been assigned by the DHCP server.
16.1.3.9 Setpoint: IBLite GateIP

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
gateway of the network segment where the controller is connected.
NT
If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address
which has been assigned by the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other
segments and/or Internet.
16.1.3.10 Setpoint: IBLite DHCP

Range [units] ENABLED, DISABLED [-]
Related All
applications
Description The setpoint is used to select the method how the Ethernet connection is
adjusted.
DISABLED:
The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask,
GateIP, DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection.
When this type of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP
address. This means that it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not
fixed (static).
ENABLED:
The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the
process of obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the
value 000.000.000.000 is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module
continues to try to obtain the settings.
16.1.3.11 Setpoint: ComAp Port

Range [units] 0 ... 65535 [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet
connection to a PC with any of ComAp PC program (i.e. LiteEdit,
InteliMonitor). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port
used by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in
special situations such as sharing a single public IP address among many
controllers or to overcome firewall restrictions.
16.1.3.12 Setpoint: APN Name

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Name of APN access point for GPRS network provided by GSM/GPRS
operator.
NT
16.1.3.13 Setpoint: APN UserName
Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description User name for APN access point provided by GSM/GPRS operator.
16.1.3.14 Setpoint: APN UserPass

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description User password for APN access point provided by GSM/GPRS operator.
16.1.3.15 Setpoint: AirGate

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint selects the Ethernet connection mode.
DISABLED:
This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic
and answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the
controller to be accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be
accessible at a public and static IP address if you want to connect to it from
the internet.
ENABLED:
This mode uses the “AirGate” service, which hides all issues with static/public
address in a black box and you do not need to do anything about it. You need
only a connection to the Internet. The AirGate server address is adjusted by
the setpoint AirGate IP.
16.1.3.16 Setpoint: AirGate IP

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the
AirGate server. Use the free AirGate server provided by ComAp at
airgate.comap.cz if your company does not operate its own AirGate server.
NT
16.1.3.17 Setpoint: SMTP UserName
Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server.
16.1.3.18 Setpoint: SMTP UserPass

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server.
16.1.3.19 Setpoint: SMTP Server IP

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g.
smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g. 74.125.39.109) of the SMTP
server. Ask your internet provider or IT manager for this information.
HINT:
You may also use one of the free SMTP servers, e.g. smtp.gmail.com.
However, note that some free SMTP servers may cause delays (up to several
hours) when sending e-mails.
If you do not want to send active e-mails, you may leave this setpoint blank,
as well as other setpoints related to SMTP server and e-mail settings.
Proper setting of SMTP-related setpoints as well as the controller mailbox are

essential for sending alerts via e-mails
16.1.3.20 Setpoint: Contr MailBox

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Enter an existing e-mail address in this setpoint. This address will be used as
the sender address in active e-mails that will be sent from the controller.
NT
16.1.3.21 Setpoint: Time Zone
Range [units] GMT -12:00 … GMT +13:00 [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located.
Refer to your computer time zone settings (click on the time indicator located
in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not sure about
your time zone.
HINT:
If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain
incorrect information about the time they were sent, which may result in
confusion about when the respective problem actually occurred.
16.1.3.22 Setpoint: DNS IP Address

Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in e-mail addresses and
server names into correct IP addresses.
If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the DNS server
assigned by the DHCP server.
16.1.4 Group: Engine Params
16.1.4.1 Setpoint: Starting RPM

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 5 ... 50 [%]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint defines the “firing” speed level as percent value of the nominal
speed. If this level is exceeded the engine is considered as started. More
information is available in the Engine start chapter.
NT
16.1.4.2 Setpoint: Start W Freq
Group Engine Params
Range [units] 0 … 2000 [Hz]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint defines starter cutoff frequency, if the engine speed is
measured from the generator frequency and the “W” terminal from the
charging alternator is connected to the pickup input. More information is
available in the Speed measurement chapter.
NOTE:
This setpoint is active only if the setpoint Gear Teeth is adjusted to zero.
16.1.4.3 Setpoint: Starting Oil P

Group Engine Params
Range [units] Configuration dependent [Configuration dependent]
Related All
applications
Description The controller will stop cranking (starter goes OFF) if the oil pressure rises
above this limit. See the description of the start procedure in a separate
chapter.
NOTE:
If an EFI engine is used, the oil pressure is read from its ECU. In the case of
a traditional engine, the analog input 1 is configured as fixed for oil pressure
measurement.
16.1.4.4 Setpoint: Prestart Time

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 0 ... 600 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Duration of the closing of the Prestart output prior to the starter motor being
energized. Set it to zero to disable this function.
16.1.4.5 Setpoint: MaxCrank Time

Group Engine Params
Related All
applications
Description Maximum duration the starter motor is energized.
NT
16.1.4.6 Setpoint: CrnkFail Pause
Group Engine Params
Related All
applications
Description Pause between crank attempts.
16.1.4.7 Setpoint: Crank Attempts

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 1 ... 10 [-]
Related All
applications
Description Max. number of crank attempts.
NOTE:
If the last attempt is not successful, the alarm Start fail is issued.
16.1.4.8 Setpoint: Idle Time

Group Engine Params
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint determines the duration of the Idle period which begins after the
engine is started. The output Idle/Nominal remains inactive during the idle
period. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.
16.1.4.9 Setpoint: Min Stab Time

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 1 ... Max Stab Time [s]
Related All
applications
Description When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the
controller will wait for a period adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB or
starting synchronizing, even if the generator voltage and frequency are
already in limits.
NT
16.1.4.10 Setpoint: Max Stab Time
Group Engine Params
Range [units] Min Stab Time … 300 [s]
Related All
applications
Description When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the
generator voltage and frequency must get within limits within this period of
time, otherwise an appropriate red alarm (generator voltage and/or
frequency) is issued.
16.1.4.11 Setpoint: Cooling Speed

Group Engine Params
Range [units] IDLE, NOMINAL
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint selects whether the cooling phase is performed at idle or
nominal speed.
16.1.4.12 Setpoint: Cooling Time

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 0 ... 3600 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Duration of the gen-set is running unloaded to cool the engine down before
stop.
16.1.4.13 Setpoint: Stop Time

Group Engine Params
Related All
applications
Description Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period
after the fuel solenoid has been de-energized and the stop solenoid
energized. The stop solenoid remains energized for the entire stop time
period.
NOTE:
See the chapter Cool down and stop for details about the stop procedure.
NT
16.1.4.14 Setpoint: SDVentil Time
Group Engine Params
Related All
applications
Description In case Fuel Solenoid is set to GAS, the SDVentilTime adjusts the time of the
starter to be switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start
attempt after shutdown or controller switch-on.
16.1.4.15 Setpoint: Fuel Solenoid

Group Engine Params
Range [units] DIESEL, GAS [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint selects the type of start-up sequence according to engine fuel
type. See details in chapter Engine start.
16.1.4.16 Setpoint: D+ Function

Group Engine Params
Range [units] ENABLED, CHRGFAIL, DISABLED [-]
Related All
applications
Description ENABLED: The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine”
detection and charge fail alarm detection.
CHRGFAIL: The D+ terminal is used for charge fail alarm detection only
DISABLED: The D+ terminal is not used.
NOTE:
The magnetization current is provided independent of this setpoint value.
16.1.4.17 Setpoint: ECU FreqSelect

Group Engine Params
Range [units] PRIMARY, SECONDARY, DEFAULT [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint is used for choosing a frequency of ECU. PRIMARY is for
frequency which is set up in basic settings. SECONDARY is for frequency
which is set up in alternative settings. DEFAULT is for frequency which is set
up by producter of ECU.
VOLVO EMSII (GE engines)
The nominal speed is selected via the VP Status proprietary frame,
parameter “Frequency select”.
SCANIA EMS/S6
The nominal speed is selected via parameters “Nominal speed switch 1” and
“Nominal speed switch 2” in the DLN1 proprietary frame.
NT
16.1.4.18 Setpoint: MaxFuelDrop
Group Engine Params
Range [units] 0 (OFF) … 50 [%/h]
Related All
applications
Description Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running
hour. When the engine is not running, the maximum allowed fuel drop-off is
preset to 5% of the total tank volume per hour.
In case of detection of theft or leak, the alarm Wrn FuelTheft is raised and the
same alarm is sent via SMS and displayed by WebSupervisor (if used).
NOTE:
Set 0 to disable Fuel Theft Protection function.
16.1.4.19 Setpoint: FuelTankVolume

Group Engine Params
Range [units] 0 … 10000 [L]
Related All
applications
Description Define a capacity of gen-set fuel tank.
16.1.5 Group: Engine Protect
16.1.5.1 Setpoint: Horn Timeout

Group Engine Protect
Related All
applications
Description Maximum time the Horn output is active. The horn always activates whenever
a new alarm occurs and can be silenced earlier by pressing the HORN
RESET button. Acknowledging alarms by pressing FAULT RESET will
silence the horn as well.
If a new alarm appears, the timeout starts to count down again from the
beginning even if the previous countdown has still not elapsed. Adjust this
setpoint to zero if you want to disable the horn completely.
16.1.5.2 Setpoint: ProtectHoldOff

Related All
applications
Description Use this setpoint to adjust the delay starting evaluation of engine running only
alarms. The delay starts to count down in the moment of transition from
starting phase to the idle phase.
NT
16.1.5.3 Setpoint: Overspeed Sd
Range [units] 100 … 150 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for overspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
16.1.5.4 Setpoint: Batt Overvolt

Range [units] Batt Undervolt ... 36 [V]
Related All
applications
Description Warning threshold for high battery voltage alarm.
16.1.5.5 Setpoint: Batt Undervolt

Range [units] 8 ... Batt Overvolt [V]
Related All
applications
Description Warning threshold for low battery voltage alarm.
16.1.5.6 Setpoint: Batt Volt Del

Related All
applications
Description Delay for low battery voltage alarm.
16.1.5.7 Setpoint: AI1 Yel

Range [units] Limits and units depend on analog input configuration
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for the yellow alarm configured to the analog input 1.
NT
16.1.5.8 Setpoint: AI1 Red
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for the red alarm configured to the analog input 1.
16.1.5.9 Setpoint: AI1 Del

Related All
applications
Description Delay of the alarms configured to the analog input 1.

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
16.1.5.16 Setpoint: WrnMaintenance

Range [units] 0 ... 10000 (OFF) [h]
Related All
applications
Description Adjust this setpoint to the requested next maintenance interval. The value will
count down when engine is running and if reaches zero, the alarm
Maintenance timer will appear.
This timer is also available in the value group Statistics, but it cannot be
modified there.
In the event that WrnMaintenance is set to 10000 h the timer is disabled and
not visible on the controller display.
NT
16.1.6 Group: Gener Protect
16.1.6.1 Setpoint: Overload BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 100 ... 200 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Limit for the generator overload alarm in % of the nominal power. The delay
of this alarm is adjustable by the setpoint Overload Del.
16.1.6.2 Setpoint: Overload Del

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for the generator overload alarm. The limit for this alarm is adjustable
by the setpoint Overload BOC.
16.1.6.3 Setpoint: Amps IDMT Del

Group Gener Protect
Related All
applications
Description IDMT curve shape selection. Amps IDMT Del is Reaction time of IDMT
protection for 200% overcurrent 𝐼gen = 2 ∙ 𝑁𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐶𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
IDMT is “very inverse” generator over current protection. Reaction time is not
constant but depends on generator over current level according to the
following formula:
𝐴𝑚𝑝𝑠 𝐼𝐷𝑀𝑇 𝐷𝑒𝑙 ∙ 𝑁𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐶𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
Reaction time =
𝐼gen − 𝑁𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝐶𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
HINT:
Reaction time is limited to 3600 = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active
for Reaction time values longer than 60 minutes.
Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current.

Example Example of Reaction time for different over current levels. Values in column
200% are IDMT Curr Del.
Overcurrent
200% = ≤ 100% 101% 110%
IDMT Curr
Del
0.2s No action 20s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200s 20s
20s No action No action 200s
(time > 3600s)
NT
Maximal Reaction time
Reaction time
Amps IDMT Del
Igen
Nominal Current Short Crct Sd
16.1.6.4 Setpoint: Short Crct BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 100 ... 500 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Limit for the generator short circuit alarm. The delay of this alarm is
adjustable by the setpoint Short Crct Del.
16.1.6.5 Setpoint: Short Crct Del

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 10.00 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for the generator short circuit alarm. The limit for this alarm is
adjustable by the setpoint Short Crct BOC.
16.1.6.6 Setpoint: Amps Unbal BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 1 ... 200 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator current unbalance alarm, relative to the nominal
current (setpoint Nomin Current).
NT
16.1.6.7 Setpoint: Amps Unbal Del
Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for generator current unbalance alarm.
16.1.6.8 Setpoint: EarthFault Sd

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 1 ... 10000 [A]
Related All
applications
Description Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.
16.1.6.9 Setpoint: EarthFault Del

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0.1 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.
16.1.6.10 Setpoint: Gen >V Sd

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] Gen <V BOC … 200 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator overvoltage alarm, relative to the nominal voltage
(setpoint Nominal Volts).
16.1.6.11 Setpoint: Gen <V BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... Gen >V Sd [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator undervoltage alarm, relative to the nominal voltage
(setpoint Nominal Volts).
NT
16.1.6.12 Setpoint: Gen V Del
Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for generator undervoltage and overvoltage alarm.
16.1.6.13 Setpoint: Volt Unbal BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 1 ... 200 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm, relative to the nominal
voltage (setpoint Nominal Volts).
16.1.6.14 Setpoint: Volt Unbal Del

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for generator voltage unbalance alarm.
16.1.6.15 Setpoint: Gen >Freq BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] Gen <Freq BOC ... 200 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator overfrequency alarm, relative to the nominal
frequency (setpoint Nominal Freq).
16.1.6.16 Setpoint: Gen <Freq BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 50 ... Gen >Freq BOC [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator underfrequency alarm, relative to the nominal
frequency (setpoint Nominal Freq).
NT
16.1.6.17 Setpoint: Gen Freq Del
Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for generator underfrequency and overfrequency alarm.
16.1.6.18 Setpoint: BusMeasError

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description If the protection is ENABLED the Bus Measure error is detected in MINT
application when the voltage on controller’s bus terminals is out of limits 20
seconds after:
a) GCB (own) was closed in MAN or AUT mode.
b) MCB (feedback) was closed in AUT mode.
c) Any other GCB in power management group (on CAN bus)
was closed.
The alarm is activated after 20s. However, the GCB (own) closing is blocked
immediately for safety reasons.
16.1.6.19 Setpoint: Reverse Pwr BOC

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 1 ... 50 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for generator reverse power alarm, relative to the Nominal power.
16.1.6.20 Setpoint: Reverse Pwr Del

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Delay for generator reverse power alarm.
16.1.6.21 Setpoint: ExcitationLoss

Group Gener Protect
Range [units] 0 ... 150 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Loss of excitation is based on measurement of negative kVAr and it is BOC-
type protection. Value is calculated from the Nominal Power. For example for
NT
200 kW gen-set 50% will represent -100 kVAr. Default value is 30%.
16.1.6.22 Setpoint: ExctLoss Del

Group Gener Protect
Related All
applications
Description Delay for evaluation of Loss of excitation. Default value is 2 s.
16.1.7 Group: Pwr Management
16.1.7.1 Setpoint: Pwr Management

Group Pwr Management
Related MINT
applications
Description The setpoint enables and disables the gen-set to be active within the power
management of the group. It performs automatic load dependent starts and
stops or load demand swap. If the power management is disabled the gen-
set’s nominal power is not part of the power management calculation,
however gen-set itself will start/stop onSys Start/Stop signal.
16.1.7.2 Setpoint: Pwr Manag Del

Group Power Management
Range [units] 0 … 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description Setpoint defines delay of the Power management. When Sys Start/Stop
signal is activated and the gen-sets should start, all the engines (where
Power Management is enabled) are started and stay running for time period
specified by this parameter. After this period elapses, only the gen-set(s)
needed according to the Power Management calculation (i.e. SystReserve
OK = 1) stay running and the rest is stopped.
Pwr management Del is useful, when you need to start gen-sets to an

unknown load. Setting for example 360s (6minutes) and activating Sys
Start/Stop will force all gen-sets to start and run for 6 minutes despite of the
power management setting.
By setting “0” the Power Management function is enabled immediately.
16.1.7.3 Setpoint: #PowerMgmtMode

Range [units] ABS(kW), REL(%) ... [-]
Related MINT
NT
applications
Description Use this setpoint to select whether the power management has to be based
on absolute reserve (in kW) or relative (in %).
NT
16.1.7.4 Setpoint: Priority
Range [units] 1 ... 32 [-]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the priority of the gen-set within the group. A lower
number represents a “higher” priority, i.e. a gen-set with lower number will
start before another one with higher number.
If the binary input Top Priority is active, the gen-set gets the highest
priority (0) independent of the setpoint setting.
NOTE:
If more than one gen-set have the same priority they will act as “one big” gen-
set.
CAUTION:
Value of the setpoint Priority is taken into account only for Load Demand
Start/Stop power management.
16.1.7.5 Setpoint: #PriorAutoSwap

Group Pwr management
Range [units] DISABLED, RUN HOURS, EFFICENT
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint selects the method of optimization of priorities:
DISABLED Optimization is disabled. Priorities are given directly by the

values adjusted in the setpoint Priority.
RUN HOURS The priority setpoints are automatically updated (swapped)

to equalize running hours of the gen-sets or to keep
constant difference of running hours by the controller.
EFFICENT This method changes the priorities (not the setpoints itself)
to optimize which gen-sets are running according to their
capacities and actual load demand. Note that this priority
swapping function may be used only if #Pwr mgmt mode
is set to ABS (kW).
Optimal power band (number of running gen-sets) is
calculated based on the nominal power of each gen-set,
their Run Hours and requested Load reserve. For gen-sets
with the same nominal power also run hour equalization is
being performed.
NOTE:
Binary input Top Priority can be used only if #PriorAutoSwap = DISABLED
NT
NOTE:
Since version IC-NT 2.0 setting #RunHrsMaxDiff = 0 or 65000 no longer switch
off the function of run hours equalization.
NOTE:
There is additional 200 ms time gap after SysAMFstrtDel in order to allow the
controllers to calculate which gen-set has to start.
16.1.7.6 Setpoint: #SysAMFStrtDel

Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system activation after the binary input
Sys Start/Stop has been activated.
This delay is typically used as “AMF start delay”, similar to the setpoint
EmergStart Del in SPtM, on multiple AMF applications without
MainsCompact. See MINT basic schemes.
16.1.7.7 Setpoint: #SysAMFStopDel

Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system deactivation after the binary
input Sys Start/Stop has been deactivated.
This delay is typically used as “Mains return delay”, similar to the setpoint
MainsReturnDel in SPtM, on multiple AMF applications without
MainsCompact. See MINT basic schemes.
16.1.7.8 Setpoint: #LoadResStrt 1

Range [units] -32000 ... LoadResStop 1 [#PowerMgmtMode dependent]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the reserve for start if the set 1 of reserves is selected,
i.e. binary input Load Reserve 2 is not active. See the power management
description to learn more about reserves.
NT
16.1.7.9 Setpoint: #LoadResStop 1
Range [units] LoadResStrt 1 ... 32000 [#PowerMgmtMode dependent]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the reserve for stop if the set 1 of reserves is selected,
i.e. binary input Load Reserve 2 is not active. See the power management
16.1.7.10 Setpoint: #LoadResStrt 2

Range [units] -32000 ... LoadResStop 2 [#PowerMgmtMode dependent]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the reserve for start if the set 2 of reserves is selected,
i.e. binary input Load Reserve 2 is active. See the power management
16.1.7.11 Setpoint: #LoadResStop 2

Range [units] LoadResStrt 2 ... 32000 [#PowerMgmtMode dependent]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the reserve for stop if the set 2 of reserves is selected,
i.e. binary input Load Reserve 2 is active. See the power management
16.1.7.12 Setpoint: #MinRun Power

Related MINT
applications
Description In case of activation LBI MinRunPower -> based on the nominal power, the
gen-sets needed for equalizing the actual MinRunPower requirement are
started (or kept running even if stop reserve is fulfilled). Note, that LBI’s Min
Run Power needs to be activated on all gen-sets in the same time.
16.1.7.13 Setpoint: #NextStrt Del

Range [units] 0 ... 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the delay for starting the next gen-set after the reserve
has dropped below the reserve for start.
NT
16.1.7.14 Setpoint: #OverldNextDel
Range [units] 0 ... 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the delay for starting the next gen-set after the reserve
has dropped below zero, i.e. the system is overloaded.
NOTE:
Adjust this setpoint as short as possible to avoid system shutdown due to
overload caused by too fast load rising.
16.1.7.15 Setpoint: #NextStopDel

Range [units] 0 ... 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the delay for stopping the gen-set after the reserve has
risen above the reserve for stop.
16.1.7.16 Setpoint: #SlowStopDel

Related MINT
applications
Description If a slow stop red alarm occurs, the affected gen-set will notify the other gen-
sets that it is no longer available, but will remain loaded until the next gen-set
starts and connects to the bus. This setpoint adjusts the maximum time the
affected gen-set will wait for another one to start. After this period it will
perform a slow stop regardless of other gen-sets.
16.1.7.17 Setpoint: RunHoursBase

Range [units] 0 ... 200000 [h]
Related MINT
applications
Description Running hours base corrects actual Running hours differences between
particular gen-sets.
Example:
Gen-set 1 actual Running hours = 1000 h.
Gen-set 2 actual Running hours = 2000 h.
Adjust RunHourBase for Gen-set 1 = 1000 h and RunHourBase for
Gen-set 2 = 2000 h to be on the same base for Running Hours Equalization.
NT
16.1.7.18 Setpoint: #RunHrsMaxDiff
Range [units] 0 … 65000 [h]
Related MINT
applications
Description Maximum allowed Running hours difference between gen-sets.
Running Hours Equalization function is only active when:
 PwrManagement = ENABLED
 BI Sys Start/Stop = ACTIVE
 #PriorAutoSwap = RUN HOURS
 #RunHrsMaxDiff is not set to 0 or 65000; only for fw version less than
2.0 (these values DISABLE Running Hours Equalization function)
When running gen-set reaches #RunHrsMaxDiff value, its Priority is

automatically swapped with the lowest priority gen-set that takes part in
Running Hours Equalization.
CAUTION:
To disable “Running Hours Equalization” function (setpoint #RunHrsMaxDiff):
setpoint #RunHrsMaxDiff = 65000 => for version IC-NT 1.3 and 1.3.1
setpoint #RunHrsMaxDiff 0 => for version IC-NT 1.4
setpoint #RunHrsMaxDiff 0 or 65000 => for version IC-NT 1.4.1+
setpoint #PriorAutoSwap ≠ RUN HOURS => for version IC-NT 2.0+
16.1.7.19 Setpoint: #PwrBnChngDIUp

Range [units] 0 - 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description Power Band Change Delay Up - this setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of
changing the power band if the load demand rose above the upper limit of the
current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #PriorAutoSwap =
EFFICENT.
16.1.7.20 Setpoint: #PwrBnChngDIDn

Range [units] 0 - 3600 [s]
Related MINT
applications
Description Power Band Change Delay Down - this setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of
changing the power band if the load demand drops below the lower limit of the
current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #PriorAutoSwap =
EFFICENT.
NT
16.1.8 Group: AMF Settings
16.1.8.1 Setpoint: EmergStart Del

Group AMF Settings
Related SPtM
applications
Description Delay between the mains failure and the automatic start of the gen-set to an
AMF operation. See more in the AMF operation chapter.
16.1.8.2 Setpoint: MainsReturnDel

Group AMF Settings
Related SPtM
applications
Description This is a “mains stabilization” time. If the mains are continuously healthy for
this period after they have returned, the controller will finish the AMF
operation (e.g. by reverse synchronization or a switchover). See more in the
AMF operation chapter.
16.1.8.3 Setpoint: Mains >V

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] Mains <V ... 150 [%]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Threshold for detection of mains failure due to overvoltage. The setpoint is
adjusted relative to the generator nominal voltage (setpoint Nominal Volts).
16.1.8.4 Setpoint: Mains <V

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 50 ... Mains >V [%]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Threshold for detection of mains failure due to undervoltage. The setpoint is
adjusted relative to the generator nominal voltage (setpoint Nominal Volts).
16.1.8.5 Setpoint: Mains V Del

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Delay for detection of mains failure due to over/undervoltage.
NT
16.1.8.6 Setpoint: Mains >Freq
Group AMF Settings
Range [units] Mains <Freq ... 150 [%]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Threshold for detection of mains failure due to overfrequency. The setpoint is
adjusted relative to the generator nominal frequency (setpoint Nominal Freq).
16.1.8.7 Setpoint: Mains <Freq

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 50 ... Mains >Freq [%]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Threshold for detection of mains failure due to underfrequency. The setpoint
is adjusted relative to the generator nominal frequency (setpoint Nominal
Freq).
16.1.8.8 Setpoint: Mains Freq Del

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 0 ... 600.0 [s]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Delay for detection of mains failure due to over/underfrequency.
16.1.8.9 Setpoint: VectorShiftLim

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 1 ... 45 [°]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Threshold for detection of mains failure due to Vector shift. A mains failure is
detected immediately when the vector surge has occurred without any delay.
16.1.8.10 Setpoint: Transfer Del

Group AMF Settings
Related SPtM
applications
Description When a switchover of the MCB and GCB is performed (in both directions),
this setpoint defines the period between one breaker being opened and the
other closed.
NT
16.1.8.11 Setpoint: MCB Close Del
Group AMF Settings
Related SPtM
applications
Description If the gen-set is still not in AMF operation e.g. GCB has not started and not
closed yet, and the mains becomes healthy again, the MCB is reclosed after
the mains are continuously healthy for this time period.
NOTE:
If the gen-set is already supplying the load, the setpoint MainsReturnDel will
be active instead of this setpoint.
16.1.8.12 Setpoint: MCB Opens On

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] MAINSFAIL, GENRUN [-]
Related SPtM
applications
Description Adjusting of the condition when MCB opens after Mains fail:
MAINSFAIL: Controller opens the MCB when Mains fail is detected (24V DC
controlled circuit breaker or contactor expected).
GENRUN: Controller opens the MCB only after the gen-set has been started,
i.e. the generator voltage is present to open the MCB (230V AC controlled
breaker expected).
16.1.8.13 Setpoint: RetFromIsland

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] MANUAL, AUTO [-]
Related SPtM
applications
Description MANUAL: When RetFromIsland = MANUAL and there is a Mains Fail, gen-
sets are started and after Mains Return operator can manually transfer the
load back to Mains even if the controller stays in AUT mode.
AUTO: No automatic mode change is performed.
NOTE:
Select RetFromIsland = MANUAL in case you need to manually control the
moment when the load is transferred back to the mains.
NT
16.1.8.14 Setpoint: BreakerOverlap
Group AMF Settings
Range [units] 0,0 ... 300,0 [s]
Related SPtM
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts maximal time period the both GCB and MCB are closed
together during the interrupt-free transfer of the load from the mains to the
gen-set and vice versa.
16.1.8.15 Setpoint: ReturnFromTEST

Group AMF Settings
Related SPtM
applications
Description Adjusting of the behaviour of the controller if the gen-set is supplying the load
in TEST mode (after mains have failed) and the mains are recovered:
DISABLED: The gen-set will remain running and supplying the load until
operating mode is changed. See Manual return from test description.
ENABLED: The controller will transfer the load back to the healthy mains and
remain running unloaded. See Automatic return from test description.
16.1.8.16 Setpoint: MCB Logic

Group AMF Settings
Range [units] CLOSE-ON, CLOSE-OFF [-]
Related SPtM
applications
Description The setpoint selects behaviour of the MCB Close/Open output:
CLOSE-ON: Binary output MCB close/open is activated, when the MCB is
requested to be closed (normal, positive logic).
CLOSE-OFF: Binary output MCB close/open is activated, when the MCB is
requested to be open (inverted, negative logic).
CAUTION!
For safety reasons it is recommended to use negative logic (CLOSE-OFF).
Using positive logic could cause the mains to be disconnected accidentally
when the controller is switched off or a wire is broken.
NT
16.1.9 Group: Sync/Load Ctrl
16.1.9.1 Setpoint: Speed Gov Char

Group Sync/Load Ctrl
Range [units] POSITIVE, NEGATIVE [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint selects the characteristic of the speed governor output of the
controller. Adjust it according to the behaviour of the remote speed input of
the governor:
POSITIVE: raising the voltage on the governor remote speed input causes
engine speed to rise.
NEGATIVE: raising the voltage on the governor remote speed input causes
engine speed to go down.
16.1.9.2 Setpoint: Speed Gov Bias

Range [units] SpeedGovLowLim ... SpeedGovHiLim [V]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the initial voltage level for the speed governor output,
which is present on the output, if no speed or power regulation loop is active.
See the chapter Governor interface for details about the recommended
settings for various governor types. To make a fine adjustment, start the gen-
set in MAN mode, leave it running unloaded and then make fine adjustment
of this setpoint to achieve nominal engine speed.
16.1.9.3 Setpoint: SpeedGovLowLim

Range [units] 0 … SpeedGovHiLim [V]
Related All
applications
Description Lower limit of the speed governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the
governor output range according to your governor type.
16.1.9.4 Setpoint: SpeedGovHiLim

Range [units] SpeedGovLowLim … 10.00 [V]
Related All
applications
Description Upper limit of the speed governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the
governor output range according to your governor type.
NT
16.1.9.5 Setpoint: TauSpeedActuat
Related All
applications
Description Time constant of the speed actuator connected to the binary outputs Speed
Up/Speed Down. Setting of this parameter affects the length of the pulses on
these binary outputs. This is to match the reaction of the controller’s regulator
with the actual reaction time of the actuator.
16.1.9.6 Setpoint: Voltage Window

Range [units] 0 … 100.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts maximum difference between generator and mains/bus
voltage in respective phases for synchronizing.
16.1.9.7 Setpoint: Phase Window

Range [units] 0 ... 90 [°]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the maximum absolute value of difference between
actual phase angle between the generator and mains/bus voltages for
synchronizing.
NOTE:
To disable issuing the breaker close command (i.e. for test purpose) adjust
this setpoint to 0. Synchronizing will continue until a timeout occurs or the
breaker is closed externally.
Allowed range of
phase angle
X = PhaseWindow difference
-X X
NT
16.1.9.8 Setpoint: Dwell Time
Range [units] 0 … 25.0 [s]
Related All
applications
Description The period of time that the phase angle difference must be within +/- Phase
Window and voltage difference within Voltage Window before the breaker is
closed.
16.1.9.9 Setpoint: Freq Gain

Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Gain of the frequency control PI loop.
16.1.9.10 Setpoint: Freq Int

Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Relative integration factor of the frequency control loop.
16.1.9.11 Setpoint: Angle Gain

Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Gain of the phase angle control loop.
During synchronization, first the frequency loop is started to match the
generator frequency with the mains or bus and after that the phase angle
loop is started to match the phase angle.
NT
16.1.9.13 Setpoint: Load Ramp
Group Sync/Load Cont
Range [units] 0 ... GCB Open Del [s]
Related All
applications
Description All changes of requested gen-set load (except in load-sharing mode) are not
made as one step, but are ramped – i.e. the requested load is changing
slowly with the rate adjusted by this setpoint.
The rate is adjusted in seconds for 100% load change (from 0 to 100% of
nominal power). So if the requested load change is 50% of nominal power,
the ramp duration will be 50% of this setpoint.
The ramp takes place in the following situations:
 The gen-set has been just synchronized and is ramping up to the
target load level (e.g. baseload in parallel to mains operation or
average gen-set load in multiple load-sharing operation)
 The gen-set is running parallel to the mains and baseload is
changed.
 The gen-set is being unloaded before opening the GCB and stop. In
this case the end load level is adjusted by the setpoint GCB Open
Level and the timeout for unloading is adjusted by the setpoint GCB
Open Del.
16.1.9.14 Setpoint: Load Gain

Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Gain of the load control PI loop.
16.1.9.15 Setpoint: Load Int

Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Relative integration factor of the load control loop.
16.1.9.16 Setpoint: GCB Open Level

Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related All
applications
Description After a stop command has been issued in parallel to mains or other gen-sets
operation, the gen-set load is ramped down before the GCB will open. Use
this setpoint to adjust the end-point of the ramp, e.g. the load level (in % of
Nominal Power) where the GCB will be opened.
NT
16.1.9.17 Setpoint: GCB Open Del
Range [units] Load Ramp ... 1800 [s]
Related All
applications
Description Use this setpoint to adjust the timeout for reaching the load level GCB Open
Level during the gen-set is being unloaded. When the timeout has elapsed,
the GCB will open regardless of the load.
16.1.9.18 Setpoint: Sync Timeout

Range [units] 1 ... 1800 [s]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of synchronizing. If synchronizing
is not successful within this period of time, the Sync Timeout or
RevSyncTimeout alarm will be issued.
16.1.9.19 Setpoint: LoadShare Gain

Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related MINT
applications
Description Gain of the load sharing control PI loop.
16.1.9.20 Setpoint: LoadShare Int

Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related MINT
applications
Description Relative integration factor of load sharing control loop.
NT
16.1.10 Group: Volt/PF Ctrl
16.1.10.1 Setpoint: AVRi Bias

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 100.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the initial PWM level for the AVR output, which is
present on the output, if no voltage or power factor regulation loop is active.
See the chapter AVR interface for details about the recommended settings
for various AVR types.
NOTE:
The voltage level on the AVR remote voltage input depends also on AVRi
output wiring and potentiometer position.
16.1.10.2 Setpoint: Voltage Gain

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 … 200.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Gain of the voltage control PI loop.
16.1.10.3 Setpoint: Voltage Int

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Relative integration factor of the voltage control loop.
16.1.10.4 Setpoint: PF Gain

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Gain of power factor control PI loop.
NT
16.1.10.5 Setpoint: PF Int
Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related All
applications
Description Relative integration factor of the power factor control loop.
16.1.10.6 Setpoint: VAr Share Gain

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 200.0 [%]
Related MINT
applications
Description Gain of VAr sharing control PI loop.
16.1.10.7 Setpoint: VAr Share Int

Group Volt/PF Ctrl
Range [units] 0 ... 100 [%]
Related MINT
applications
Description Relative integration factor of VAr sharing control loop.
16.1.11 Group: ExtI/O Protect
16.1.11.1 Setpoint: IOM AI1 Yel

Group ExtI/O Protect
Related All
applications
Description Threshold for the yellow alarm configured to the analog input 1 of the
extension module IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.
16.1.11.2 Setpoint: IOM AI1 Red

Related All
applications
Description Threshold for the red alarm configured to the analog input 1 of the extension
module IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.
NT
16.1.11.3 Setpoint: IOM AI1 Del
Related All
applications
Description Delay of the alarms configured to the analog input 1 of the extension module
IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications

Related All
applications
IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
IG-IOM or IGS-PTM.
NT
16.1.12 Group: SMS/E-Mail
16.1.12.1 Setpoint: Yel Alarm Msg

Group SMS/E-Mail
Range [units] OFF, ON [-]
Related All
applications
Description Set this setpoint to YES if you want to get messages when a yellow alarm
occurs.
NOTE:
The target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be set
correctly to the setpoint(s) Phone/Addr 1 or Phone/Addr 2.
16.1.12.2 Setpoint: Red Alarm Msg

Group SMS/E-Mail
Related All
applications
Description Set this setpoint to YES if you want to get messages when a red alarm
occurs.
NOTE:
The target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be set
correctly to the setpoint(s) Phone/Addr 1 or Phone/Addr 2.
16.1.12.3 Setpoint: Event Msg

Group SMS/E-Mail
Related All
applications
Description Set this setpoint to ON if you want to get messages when a new event
occurs. For target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be
set correctly to the setpoint(s) TelNo/Addr Ch1 or TelNo/Addr Ch2.
NT
16.1.12.4 Setpoint: TelNo/Addr Ch1
Group SMS/E-Mail
Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number or e-mail address
where the alarm messages shall be sent.
NOTE:
For GSM numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would
dial if you wanted to make a local call) or the full international format
beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
NOTE:
This setpoint can be modified from a PC only!
16.1.12.5 Setpoint: TelNo/Addr Ch2

Group SMS/E-Mail
Range [units] [-]
Related All
applications
Description Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number or e-mail where the
alarm messages shall be sent.
NOTE:
For GSM numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would
dial if you wanted to make a local call) or the full international format
beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
NOTE:
This setpoint can be modified from a PC only!
16.1.13 Group: AnalogSwitches
16.1.13.1 Setpoint: AnaSwitch1 ON

Group AnalogSwitches
Related All
applications
Description Threshold level for switching ON the analog switch assigned to the analog
input 1 of the controller.
NT
16.1.13.2 Setpoint: AnaSwitch1 OFF
Related All
applications
Description Threshold level for switching OFF the analog switch assigned to the analog

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
NT
16.1.13.7 Setpoint: PowerSwitch ON
Range [units] 0 … 32000 [kW]
Related All
applications
Description On level for power switch activation, see Power switch chapter.
16.1.13.8 Setpoint: PowerSwitchOFF

Related All
applications
Description Off level for power switch activation, see Power switch chapter.
16.1.14 Group: Date/Time
16.1.14.1 Setpoint: Time Stamp Per

Group Date/Time
Range [units] 0 … 240 [min]
Related All
applications
Description If the gen-set is running, the Time stamp records are written periodically into
the history. Use this setpoint to adjust the period in which these records are
written. Adjust the setpoint to 0 to disable this function.
NOTE:
The shorter the timestamp period, the earlier the history log will be
overwritten by Time stamp records. For example, if the period is set to 1 min,
the history will be overwritten after approx. 2 hours of continuous operation.
16.1.14.2 Setpoint: #SummerTimeMod

Group Date/Time
Range [units] DISABLED, WINTER, SUMMER, WINTER-S, SUMMER-S [-]
Related All
applications
Description  DISABLED: time mode switching is disabled.
 WINTER: northern hemisphere winter time is valid for the current
time period.
 SUMMER: northern hemisphere summer (daylight saving) time is
valid for the current time period.
 WINTER-S: southern hemisphere winter time is valid for the current
time period.
 SUMMER-S: southern hemisphere summer (daylight saving) time is
valid for the current time period.
NT
16.1.14.3 Setpoint: #Time
Group Date/Time
Range [units] [hh.mm.ss]
Related All
applications
Description System time can be modified here. The system time is stored in a battery-
backup RTC circuit and does not normally need to be adjusted except for
initial setting and occasional corrections.
The system date and time is used for the exercise timers as well as for the
history log. Each record in the history log contains a date/time stamp.
NOTE:
If the system date and time become inaccurate after the controller has been
switched off for a long period of time, it may indicate that the backup battery
needs to be replaced.
16.1.14.4 Setpoint: #Date

Group Date/Time
Range [units] [dd.mm.yyyy]
Related All
applications
Description System date can be modified here. The system date is stored in a battery-
backup RTC circuit and does not normally need to be adjusted except for
initial setting.
The system date and time is used for the exercise timers as well as for the
history log. Each record in the history log contains a date/time stamp.
NOTE:
If the system date and time becomes incorrect after the controller has been
switched off for a long period of time, it may indicate that the backup battery
needs to be replaced.
16.1.14.5 Setpoint: Timer1 Repeat

Group Date/Time
Range [units] NONE, MONDAY, TUESDAY, ... SUNDAY, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, MON-
SUN, SAT-SUN [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the repetition period of the Timer 1. Learn more about
exercise timers in a separate chapter.
NT
16.1.14.6 Setpoint: Timer1 ON Time
Group Date/Time
Range [units] [hh:mm:ss]
Related All
applications
Description Timer 1 will be activated at this time on selected day(s). Learn more about
16.1.14.7 Setpoint: Timer1Duration

Group Date/Time
Range [units] 1 ... 1440 [min]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the duration that Timer 1 will be active within one cycle.
Learn more about exercise timers in a separate chapter.
16.1.14.8 Setpoint: Timer1Function

Group Date/Time
Range [units] No Func, Mode OFF, MFail Blk, TEST, TEST OnLd [-]
Related All
applications
Description It is possible to choose among the following 5 (for SPtM) or 3 (for MINT)
Timer functions. The binary output Exerc Timer 1 is always activated when
the Timer is active regardless of chosen Timer function.
MINT Only
There is no other function besides binary output Exerc Timer1
No Func activation
When this option is chosen the Timer output is also internally
Mode OFF connected to the Remote OFF binary input
When this option is chosen the Timer directly starts gen-set (in
AutoRun
AUT mode)
SPtM Only
There is no other function besides binary output Exerc Timer1
No Func
activation
Mode OFF connected to the Remote OFF binary input

MFail Blk connected to the MainsFailBlock binary input.
TEST connected to the Remote TEST binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen the Timer output is also internally
OnLd connected to the Rem TEST OnLd binary input.
NT
16.1.14.9 Setpoint: Timer2 Repeat
Group Date/Time
Range [units] NONE, MONDAY, TUESDAY, ... SUNDAY, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, MON-
SUN, SAT-SUN [-]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the repetition period of Timer 2. Learn more about
16.1.14.10 Setpoint: Timer2 ON Time

Group Date/Time
Range [units] [hh:mm:ss]
Related All
applications
Description Timer 2 will be activated at this time on selected day(s). Learn more about
16.1.14.11 Setpoint: Timer2Duration

Group Date/Time
Range [units] 1 … 1440 [min]
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint adjusts the duration that Timer 2 will be active within one cycle.
Learn more about exercise timers in a separate chapter.
NT
16.1.14.12 Setpoint: Timer2 Function
Group Date/Time
Range [units] No Func, Mode OFF, MFail Blk, TEST, TEST OnLd [-]
Related All
applications
Description It is possible to choose among the following 5 (for SPtM) or 3 (for MINT)
Timer functions. The binary output Exerc Timer 2 is always activated when
the Timer is active regardless of the chosen Timer function.
MINT Only
There is no other function besides binary output Exerc

No Func
Timer 2 activation
When this option is chosen the Timer output is also
Mode OFF
internally connected to the Remote OFF binary input
When this option is chosen the Timer directly starts gen-set
AutoRun
(in AUT mode)
SPtM Only
There is no other function besides binary output Exerc Timer

No Func
2 activation
Mode OFF
connected to the Remote OFF binary input
MFail Blk
connected to the MainsFailBlock binary input.
TEST
connected to the Remote TEST binary input.
TEST OnLd
connected to the Rem TEST OnLd binary input.
16.1.15 Group: Sensors Spec
16.1.15.1 Setpoint: AI1Calibration

Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint can be used to “calibrate” the controller analog input 1, i.e. shift
the measured value on the analog input with a constant. The setpoint
(constant) is always added to the measured analog value.
NOTE:
It is recommended to perform the calibration under operating conditions, i.e.
perform a coolant temperature sensor calibration when the engine is warm,
not cold.
NT
Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
NOTE:
not cold.

Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
NOTE:
not cold.
16.1.15.4 Setpoint: IOM AI1 Calibr

Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint can be used to “calibrate” the analog input 1 of the extension
module IG-IOM or IGS-PTM, i.e. shift the measured value on the analog input
with a constant. The setpoint (constant) is always added to the measured
analog value.
NOTE:
not cold.
NT
Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
Description This setpoint can be used to "calibrate" the analog input 2 of the extension
analog value.
NOTE:
not cold.

Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
analog value.
NOTE:
not cold.

Group Sensors Spec
Related All
applications
analog value.
NOTE:
not cold.
NT
16.2 Table of values
16.2.1 Group: Engine
16.2.1.1 Value: RPM

Group Engine
Units RPM
Related All
applications
Description This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one
of the following sources:
 ECU, if an ECU is configured
 Pickup input
 Generator frequency
Learn more in the Speed measurement chapter.
16.2.1.2 Value: W-TerminalFreq

Group Engine
Units Hz
Related All
applications
Description Frequency measured on the pickup input if the setpoint Gear Teeth is
adjusted to zero and it is expected that the “W” terminal from the charging
alternator is connected to the pickup input.
16.2.1.3 Value: ECU State

Group Engine
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Shows binary status (0 or 1) of ECU:
 ECU Yellow Lamp
 ECU Red Lamp
 WaitToStrt
16.2.1.4 Value: Fuel Rate ECU

Group Engine
Units L/h or G/h – selectable in configuration (LiteEdit)
Related All
applications
Description Current fuel consumption obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU
is not configured or if the particular ECU does not provide this value.
NT
16.2.1.5 Value: Cool Temp ECU
Group Engine
Units ºC/ºF – selectable in configuration (LiteEdit)
Related All
applications
Description Coolant temperature obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU is
not configured or if the particular ECU does not provide this value.
16.2.1.6 Value: IntakeTemp ECU

Group Engine
Related All
applications
Description Intake air temperature obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU is
16.2.1.7 Value: Oil Press ECU

Group Engine
Units Bar/Psi – selectable in configuration (LiteEdit)
Related All
applications
Description Oil pressure obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU is not
configured or if the particular ECU does not provide this value.
16.2.1.8 Value: Oil Temp ECU

Group Engine
Related All
applications
Description Oil temperature obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU is not
16.2.1.9 Value: BoostPress ECU

Group Engine
Units Bar/Psi – selectable in configuration (LiteEdit)
Related All
applications
Description Engine boost pressure obtained from the ECU. Contains invalid flag if ECU is
NT
16.2.1.10 Value: Perc Load ECU
Group Engine
Units %
Related All
applications
Description “Percent load at current speed” value obtained from the ECU. Contains
invalid flag if ECU is not configured or if the particular ECU does not provide
this value.
16.2.1.11 Value: FuelLevel ECU

Group Engine
Units %
Related All
applications
Description Fuel level obtained from the J1939 bus. Contains invalid flag if ECU is not
16.2.1.12 Value: ECU FreqSelect

Group Engine
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Shows selected frequency of ECU. “0” means PRIMARY, “1” is
SECONDARY and “#####” is DEFAULT.
16.2.1.13 Value: Speed Request

Group Engine
Units %
Related All
applications
Description Engine speed control via CAN bus.
Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%
NOTE:
This function (speed adjust via CAN bus) has to be supported by the engine
ECU. Without the support, ComAp controllers can not adjust the engine
speed.
NT
16.2.1.14 Value: SpeedReq RPM
Group Engine
Units RPM
Related All
applications
Description Requested engine speed.
16.2.1.15 Value: DPF1 Soot Load

Group Engine
Units %
Related All
applications
Description The rate of soot in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).
16.2.1.16 Value: DPF1 Ash Load

Group Engine
Units %
Related All
applications
Description The rate of ash in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).
16.2.2 Group: Generator
16.2.2.1 Value: Gen kW

Group Generator
Units kW
Related All
applications
Description Generator active power.
16.2.2.2 Value: Gen kW L1

Group Generator
Units kW
Related All
applications
Description Generator active power in phase L1.

Group Generator
NT
Units kW
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units kW
Related All
applications
16.2.2.5 Value: Gen kVAr

Group Generator
Units kVAr
Related All
applications
Description Generator reactive power.
16.2.2.6 Value: Gen kVAr L1

Group Generator
Units kVAr
Related All
applications
Description Generator reactive power in phase L1.

Group Generator
Units kVAr
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units kVAr
Related All
applications
NT
16.2.2.9 Value: Gen kVA
Group Generator
Units kVA
Related All
applications
Description Generator apparent power.
16.2.2.10 Value: Gen kVA L1

Group Generator
Units kVA
Related All
applications
Description Generator apparent power in phase L1.

Group Generator
Units kVA
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units kVA
Related All
applications
16.2.2.13 Value: Gen PF

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Generator power factor.
NT
16.2.2.14 Value: Gen Load Char
Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Character of the generator load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive
and “R” is resistive load (power factor = 1).
16.2.2.15 Value: Gen PF L1

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Generator power factor in phase L1.
16.2.2.16 Value: Gen Lchr L1

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Character of the generator load in the L1 phase. “L” means inductive load,
“C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor = 1).

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
NT
Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units -
Related All
applications
16.2.2.21 Value: Gen Freq

Group Generator
Units Hz
Related All
applications
Description Generator frequency taken from phase L3.
16.2.2.22 Value: Gen V L1-N

Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
Description Generator phase L1 voltage.

Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
NT
Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
16.2.2.25 Value: Gen V L1-L2

Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
Description Generator phase L1 to phase L2 voltage.
16.2.2.26 Value: Gen V L2-L3

Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
16.2.2.27 Value: Gen V L3-L1

Group Generator
Units V
Related All
applications
16.2.2.28 Value: Gen A L1

Group Generator
Units A
Related All
applications
Description Generator current phase L1.
NT
Group Generator
Units A
Related All
applications

Group Generator
Units A
Related All
applications
16.2.2.31 Value: EarthFaultCurr

Group Generator
Units A
Related MINT
applications
Description Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.
16.2.3 Group: Mains
16.2.3.1 Value: Mains Freq

Group Mains
Units Hz
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains frequency taken from phase L3.
16.2.3.2 Value: Mains V L1-N

Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains phase L1 voltage.
NT
Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications

Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications
16.2.3.5 Value: Mains V L1-L2

Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains phase L1 to phase L2 voltage.

Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications

Group Mains
Units V
Related SPtM
applications
NT
16.2.3.8 Value: Mains A L3/EF
Group Mains
Units A
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains effective current in phase L3.
16.2.3.9 Value: Mains kW I

Group Mains
Units kW
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains active power.
16.2.3.10 Value: Mains kVAr I

Group Mains
Units kVAr
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains reactive power.
16.2.3.11 Value: Mains PF

Group Mains
Units -
Related SPtM
applications
Description Mains power factor.
16.2.3.12 Value: Mains LChr

Group Mains
Units -
Related SPtM
applications
Description Character of the mains. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).
NT
16.2.3.13 Value: Load kW
Group Mains
Units kW
Related SPtM
applications
Description Load active power.
16.2.3.14 Value: Load kVAr

Group Mains
Units kVAr
Related SPtM
applications
Description Load reactive power.
16.2.3.15 Value: Load PF

Group Mains
Units -
Related SPtM
applications
Description Load power factor.
16.2.3.16 Value: Load LChr

Group Mains
Units -
Related SPtM
applications
Description Character of the load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).
16.2.3.17 Value: Slip

Group Mains
Units Hz
Related All
applications
Description Differential frequency between the gen-set and the mains.
NT
16.2.3.18 Value: Angle
Group Mains
Units °
Related All
applications
Description The phase shift between the gen-set and the mains voltage.
16.2.3.19 Value: MaxVectorShift

Group Mains
Units º
Related SPtM
applications
Description This is the maximum measured value of the vector shift of the generator
voltage. The value is reset to 0 automatically in the moment of closing the
GCB.
16.2.4 Group: Bus
16.2.4.1 Value: Bus Freq

Group Bus
Units Hz
Related MINT
applications
Description Bus frequency taken from phase L3.
16.2.4.2 Value: Bus V L1-N

Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications
Description Bus phase L1 voltage.

Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications
NT
Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications
16.2.4.5 Value: Bus V L1-L2

Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications
Description Bus phase L1 to phase L2 voltage.

Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications

Group Bus
Units V
Related MINT
applications
16.2.4.8 Value: Slip

Group Mains
Units Hz
Related MINT
applications
Description Differential frequency between the gen-set and the mains.
NT
16.2.4.9 Value: Angle
Group Mains
Units °
Related MINT
applications
Description The phase shift between the gen-set and the mains voltage.
16.2.5 Group: Pwr Management
16.2.5.1 Value: Actual Reserve

Group Power management
Units kW or % (depends on #PowerMgmtMode setpoint)
Related MINT
applications
Description #PowerMgmtMode setpoint is set to ABS(kW):
This value represents the difference between the current load of the group
and the nominal capacity of the currently loaded gen-sets.
Actual Reserve = ∑ 𝑃nom − ∑ 𝑃act [kW]
#PowerMgmtMode setpoint is set to REL(%):

This value represents the difference between the actual relative load of the
group and 100%.
∑ 𝑃act
Actual Reserve = 100 ∙ (1 − ) [%]
∑ 𝑃nom
𝑃nom = Running NomPwr and 𝑃act = Running ActPwr.
16.2.5.2 Value: Running ActPwr

Units kW
Related MINT
applications
Description Sum of active power of all gen-sets within the group that are connected to
the bus and are performing the power management, i.e. that are in AUT
mode and have power management enabled.
NT
16.2.5.3 Value: Running Q-Pwr
Units kVAr
Related MINT
applications
Description Sum of reactive power of all gen-sets within the group that are connected to
16.2.5.4 Value: Running NomPwr

Units kW
Related MINT
applications
Description Sum of nominal power of all gen-sets within the group that are connected to
16.2.5.5 Value: Avail Nom Pwr

Units kW
Related MINT
applications
Description Sum of nominal load of all active gen-sets within the group.
16.2.5.6 Value: Priority

Units -
Related MINT
applications
Description This value shows the current priority number. If the binary input Top Priority is
active, the priority number will be 0, otherwise the value will correspond to the
setpoint Priority. See the chapter Power management for details.
16.2.5.7 Value: Act Pwr Band

Range [units] -
Related MINT
applications
Description The values show which gen-sets (controller CAN addresses) are running in
current active power band.
NT
16.2.5.8 Value: Next Pwr Band
Range [units] -
Related MINT
applications
Description The values show which gen-sets (controller CAN addresses) will run if the load
demand rose above the upper limit of the current power band.
16.2.6 Group: Controller I/O
16.2.6.1 Value: Battery Volts

Group Controller I/O
Units V
Related All
applications
Description Controller supply voltage.
16.2.6.2 Value: D+
Units V
Related All
applications
Description D+ terminal voltage.
16.2.6.3 Value: Analog Input 1

Units configurable
Related All
applications
Description This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller. It will contain an
invalid flag if the input is not used or sensor fail is detected on it.

Units configurable
Related All
applications
NT
Units configurable
Related All
applications
16.2.6.6 Value: Bin Inputs

Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of the physical binary inputs of the
controller. Bit0 represents BI1, bit1 represents BI2, etc.
NOTE:
In LiteEdit and on the controller screen this value is displayed in “normal
order”, i.e. BI1 in the leftmost position
16.2.6.7 Value: Bin Outputs

Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of the physical binary outputs of the
controller. Bit0 represents BO1, bit1 represents BO2, etc.
NOTE:
order”, i.e. BO1 in the leftmost position.
16.2.6.8 Value: Speed Gov Out

Units V
Related All
applications
Description This is the actual voltage on the speed governor output of the controller. In
the event that the output is switched to PWM mode, the relation is
10V ~ 100% PWM.
16.2.6.9 Value: AVRi Output

Units %
NT
Related All
applications
Description This is the actual PWM percentage on the AVRi output of the controller.
16.2.6.10 Value: GSM SignalLvl

Units %
Related All
applications
Description IL-NT-GPRS module shows the strength of the GSM signal. It is a relative
value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting cases.
16.2.6.11 Value: GSM ErrorRate

Units -
Related All
applications
Description IL-NT-GPRS module shows this information for relative evaluation of signal
quality. The lower value, the higher the signal quality.
16.2.6.12 Value: GSM Diag Code

Units -
Related All
applications
Description Diagnostic code for the IL-NT-GPRS modem. Standard GSM modems usually
support this value as well. Helps in troubleshooting.
TABLE OF DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 IL-NT-base is switched off
3 IL-NT-GPRS is switched on
4 IL-NT-GPRS – error in initialization
5 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to set the APN
6 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 IL-NT-GPRS – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
14 GSM modem did not accept particular initialization command, possibly caused by
NT
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate
16.2.6.13 Value: AirGate Diag

Units -
Related All
applications
Description Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
TABLE OF DIAGNOSTIC CODES:
Code Description
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized
16.2.6.14 Value: AirGate ID

Units -
Related All
applications
Description Identification name generated by AirGate server for the purpose of
establishing communication via WebSupervisor, LiteEdit or InteliMonitor.
16.2.6.15 Value: Modem Status

Units -
Related All
applications
Description Status of the modem.
 “--------“ After controller initialization
 “Trying” Modem active. Trying to establish connection.
 “Ready” Modem ready. Communication with modem is OK.
NT
16.2.7 Group: Extension I/O
16.2.7.1 Value: IOM AI1

Group Extension I/O
Units configurable
Related All
applications
Description This is the value of the analog input 1 of the IOM/PTM extension module. It
will contain an invalid flag if the input or module is not used or sensor fail is
detected on it.

Group Extension I/O
Units configurable
Related All
applications
detected on it.

Group Extension I/O
Units configurable
Related All
applications
detected on it.

Group Extension I/O
Units configurable
Related All
applications
detected on it.
NT
16.2.7.5 Value: IOM Bin Inp
Group Extension I/O
Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of physical binary inputs of the
IOM/PTM extension module. Bit0 represents BI1, bit1 represents BI2, etc.
NOTE:
order”, i.e. BI1 in the leftmost position.
16.2.7.6 Value: ExtM Bin Inp

Group Extension I/O
Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of physical binary inputs of the
extension plugin module. Bit0 represents ExM BI1, bit1 represents ExM BI2,
etc.
NOTE:
In the LiteEdit and on the controller screen this value is displayed in “normal
order”, i.e. ExM BI1 in the leftmost position.
16.2.7.7 Value: RA Bin Out

Group Extension I/O
Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of the LED indicators of the RA15
module. Bit0 represents the top left LED, bit14 represents the bottom right
LED.
NOTE:
order”, i.e. bit0 in the leftmost position.
NT
16.2.7.8 Value: IOM Bin Out
Group Extension I/O
Units -
Related All
applications
Description This is a bit array containing the status of physical binary outputs of the
IOM/PTM module. Bit0 represents BO1, bit1 represents BO2, etc.
NOTE:
order”, i.e. BO1 in the leftmost position.
16.2.8 Group: Statistics
16.2.8.1 Value: Energy kWh

Group Statistics
Units kWh
Related All
applications
Description Active energy counter.
16.2.8.2 Value: Energy kVArh

Group Statistics
Units kVArh
Related All
applications
Description Reactive energy counter.
16.2.8.3 Value: Run Hours

Group Statistics
Units h
Related All
applications
Description Engine operation hours counter. If an ECU is configured and it provides
engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU. If the value is not
available from the ECU or if an ECU is not configured, the engine hours are
incremented in the controller while the engine is running.
NT
16.2.8.4 Value: Num Starts
Group Statistics
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the
particular start command will take more than one attempt.
16.2.8.5 Value: Maintenance

Group Statistics
Units h
Related All
applications
Description Countdown until next maintenance. Initial value can be set in Engine Protect
– WrnMaintenace.
16.2.8.6 Value: Num E-Stops

Group Statistics
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Emergency stop alarms counter.
16.2.8.7 Value: Shutdowns

Group Statistics
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown
alarm, not only real shutdowns of the gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by
2 if two shutdown alarms appear simultaneously.
NT
16.2.8.8 Value: TotFuelConsum
Group Statistics
Units L
Related All
applications
Description Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller
automatically updates this value every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in
three ways:
- Direct reading from ECU
- Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
- Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level AI +
FuelTankVolume setpoint)
NOTE:
The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU
values or precision of FuelTankVolume and fuel level sensor.
16.2.8.9 Value: PerTotFuelCons

Group Statistics
Units L
Related All
applications
Description Value of Period Fuel Consumption is calculated from the Total Fuel
Consumption. It can be reset by the PerFuelConsRes binary input.
16.2.9 Group: Date/Time
16.2.9.1 Value: Time

Group Info
Units hh:mm:ss
Related All
applications
Description Shows setup time.
16.2.9.2 Value: Date

Group Info
Units dd.mm.yyyy
Related All
applications
Description Shows setup date.
NT
16.2.10 Group: Info
16.2.10.1 Value: Engine State

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description The value contains the numeric code of the “engine state” message which is
shown on the main screen of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using LiteEdit. Open
any connection (also offline with a previously saved archive) and go to the
menu Controller -> Generate CFG image. The resulting file will contain the
assignment of texts to the codes.
16.2.10.2 Value: Breaker State

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description The value contains the numeric code of the “breaker state” message which is
shown on the main screen of the controller.
16.2.10.3 Value: Timer Text

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description The value contains the numeric code of the “Current process timer” text
which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
NT
16.2.10.4 Value: Timer Value
Group Info
Units s
Related All
applications
Description The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the
main screen of the controller.
16.2.10.5 Value: FW Version

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Major and minor firmware version number. This value does not contain the
release version number.
16.2.10.6 Value: FW Branch

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description Firmware branch code. Contains 1 in the case of standard branches.
16.2.10.7 Value: PasswordDecode

Group Info
Units -
Related All
applications
Description This value contains a number which can be used for retrieving a lost
password. Send this number together with the controller serial number to
your distributor if you have lost your password.
16.2.10.8 Value: CAN16

Group Info
Units -
Related MINT
applications
Description Each bit of this value shows if a controller with the corresponding address is
found on the bus. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc.
NT
16.2.10.9 Value: CAN32
Group Info
Units -
Related MINT
applications
Description Each bit of this value shows if a controller with the corresponding address is
found on the bus. Bit 0 represents address 16 etc.
16.2.10.10 Value: GensLoaded16

Group Info
Units -
Related MINT
applications
Description Each bit if set represents gen-set with its GCB closed.
16.2.10.11 Value: GensLoaded32

Group Info
Units -
Related MINT
applications
Description Each bit if set represents gen-set with its GCB closed.
16.3 Table of binary input functions
16.3.1 Common functions
16.3.1.1 Binary input: GCB Feedback

Related All
applications
Description This is an input from the generator circuit breaker or contactor auxiliary
contact. If the input is active, the controller will consider the GCB as closed
and vice versa. If the GCB is not in the expected position, the alarm GCB Fail
will occur.
NT
16.3.1.2 Binary input: MCB Feedback
Related All
applications
Description This is an input from the Mains circuit breaker or contactor auxiliary contact. If
the input is active, the controller will consider the MCB as closed and vice
versa. According to the MCB position the controller differentiates between
Parallel to Mains operation and Island operation.
SPtM, MainsCompact: If the MCB is not in the expected position, the alarm
MCB Fail will occur.
16.3.1.3 Binary input: Emergency Stop

Related All
applications
Description This input will activate the built-in Emergency Stop alarm. It is recommended
to use the “NC” button for this input because of safety reasons.
CAUTION!
This is a software function only. See the chapter Emergency stop in the
Installation section of this manual if a “hard-wired” emergency stop function is
needed.
16.3.1.4 Binary input: Sd Override

Related All
applications
Description If this input is active, all red alarms except emergency stop and overspeed
are suppressed. The suppressed alarms will be displayed in the alarmlist, but
they will not take effect regarding the gen-set control.
NOTE:
This input is designed to be used only while the gen-set is supplying pumps
for automatic fire-extinguishing devices (sprinklers) or in other situations,
where providing power is more important than protecting the gen-set.
CAUTION!
Misuse of this input can cause damage to the gen-set!
16.3.1.5 Binary input: Access Lock

Related All
applications
Description If this input is active, then change of all setpoints and controller mode is
disabled, even if the password is entered.
NOTE:
Active access lock is indicated by an “L” letter in the upper right corner of the
controller main screen.
NOTE:
This input does not disable remote changes of setpoints i.e. from LiteEdit.
NT
16.3.1.6 Binary input: Remote OFF
Related All
applications
Description This input switches the controller into OFF mode independent of which mode
is selected by the mode selector on the controller main screen. Learn more
about controller modes in the Operating modes chapter.
If multiple “remote mode” inputs are active at the same time, the highest
priority has Remote OFF, then Remote TEST, Remote MAN and Remote
AUT.
16.3.1.7 Binary input: Remote MAN

Related All
applications
Description This input switches the controller into MAN mode independent of which mode
priority is held by Remote OFF, then Remote TEST, Remote MAN and
Remote AUT.
16.3.1.8 Binary input: Remote AUT

Related All
applications
Description This input switches the controller into AUT mode independent of which mode
Remote AUT.
16.3.1.9 Binary input: RemControlLock

Related All
applications
Description If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the
gen-set control – e.g. writing of commands and setpoint changes – from
remote communication interfaces (RS232, Modem, Modbus, iG-IB, i-LB).
NT
16.3.1.10 Binary input: Emergency MAN
Related All
applications
Description This input is designed to allow the gen-set to be controlled externally, not by
the controller. This feature can be useful in case of testing the gen-set or in
case of some failure, which disables the gen-set to be controlled by the
controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
 Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
 Stops all functions regarding the gen-set control, deactivates all
outputs related to it.
 Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not
activated if nonzero speed is detected.
 When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control over the
gen-set according to the situation the gen-set was in the moment of
deactivation, i.e. the gen-set remains running loaded if it was running
and GCB was closed in the moment the input was deactivated.
16.3.1.11 Binary input: Start Button

Related All
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external start button for control of the gen-set in
manual mode. It works the same way as the start button on the panel.
16.3.1.12 Binary input: Stop Button

Related All
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external stop button for control of the gen-set in
manual mode. It works the same way as the stop button on the panel.
NOTE:
For safety reasons it is recommended to configure this input as NC input and
use a NC button.
16.3.1.13 Binary input: FaultResButton

Related All
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external fault reset button. It works the same
way as the fault reset button on the panel.
16.3.1.14 Binary input: HornResButton

Related All
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external horn reset button. It works the same
way as the horn reset button on the panel.
NT
16.3.1.15 Binary input: GCB Button
Related All
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external GCB button for control of the gen-set
in manual mode. It works the same way as the GCB button on the panel.
16.3.1.16 Binary input: ForwSyncDisabl

Related All
applications
Description If the input is active, the controller will not continue to synchronize after Min
Stab Time elapsed even in AUT mode. If an island condition occurs (mains
fails), the gen-set will take the island load.
16.3.1.17 Binary input: NeutralCB fdb

Related All
applications
Description Use this input to detect whether the Neutral circuit breaker is open or closed.
See also setpoint #Neutral cont and binary output Neutral CB C/O.
16.3.1.18 Binary input: PerFuelConsRes

Related All
applications
Description If the input is active, the controller will not continue to synchronize after Min
Stab Time even in AUT mode. If an island condition occurs (mains fails), the
gen-set will take the island load.
16.3.2 MINT specific
16.3.2.1 Binary input: Sys Start/Stop

Related MINT
applications
Description This input activates the power management in the controller. If this input is
not active, the gen-set is stopped in AUT mode and does not take part within
the power management of the group.
NOTE:
In most cases this input is wired parallel into all controllers within the group to
activate and deactivate the whole group. If you want to deactivate one
particular gen-set, switch it out from AUT mode.
NOTE:
If the power management is disabled by the Pwr Management setpoint, the
gen-set is started and stopped only according to this input.
NT
16.3.2.2 Binary input: Load Reserve 2
Related MINT
applications
Description This input selects the currently used pair of reserves for the power
management. If the input is active, the pair LoadResStrt 2 and LoadResStop
2 is active instead of LoadResStrt 1 and LoadResStop 1.
16.3.2.3 Binary input: Min Run Power

Related MINT
applications
Description Use this input if you need to ensure that the nominal power of loaded gen-
sets does not drop below the value of Min Run Power even if the reserve for
stop is fulfilled.
16.3.2.4 Binary input: Top Priority

Related MINT
applications
Description If this input is active, the controller will have the highest priority in the group
independent of the setpoint Priority. Setpoint is evaluated only in Load
Demand Star/Stop regime.
16.3.3 SPtM specific
16.3.3.1 Binary input: Rem Start/Stop

Related SPtM
applications
Description Use this input to start and stop the gen-set in AUT mode.
16.3.3.2 Binary input: Remote TEST

Related SPtM
applications
Description This input switches the controller into TEST mode independent of which
mode is selected by the mode selector on the controller main screen. Learn
more about controller modes in the Operating modes chapter.
Remote AUT.
16.3.3.3 Binary input: Rem TEST OnLd

Related SPtM
applications
Description This input switches the controller into TEST mode like Remote TEST, but
forces the controller to take the load, i.e. perform the test on load procedure.
NT
16.3.3.4 Binary input: RevSyncDisable
Related SPtM
applications
Description If the input is active, the controller will not perform reverse synchronizing
when the mains have returned, but performs a changeover instead.
16.3.3.5 Binary input: MCB Button

Related SPtM
applications
Description This input is to be used as an external MCB button for control of the breaker
in manual mode. It works the same way as the MCB button on the panel.
16.3.3.6 Binary input: Ext MF Relay

Related SPtM
applications
Description This input can be used for connecting an external mains protection relay. If
the input is activated, the controller will consider the mains to have failed and
will perform all appropriate actions.
16.3.3.7 Binary input: MainsFailBlock

Related SPtM
applications
Description If the input is active, the gen-set will not start after the mains fail although the
controller is in AUT mode. If the gen-set is already running and the input has
been activated, the timer ReturtnDel starts to count then the GCB is opened,
gen-set goes to cooling procedure and stops The input simulates healthy
mains.
NOTE:
THE MCB WILL CLOSE WHILE THE GCB IS OPENING!
16.4 Table of binary output functions
16.4.1 Common functions
16.4.1.1 Binary output: Starter

Related All
applications
Description This output is dedicated for starter motor control.
NOTE:
Learn more about starting procedure in the chapter Engine start.
NT
16.4.1.2 Binary output: Battery B
Related All
applications
Description This output should be used in case that two batteries for starting are used.
Batter B output switches between two alternative sources of power, battery A
and battery B. Battery B output is opened for the first cranking cycle which is
designated for Battery A and closes for the second cranking cycle which is
designated for Battery B (in case that two batteries for cranking are used).
Starter 1st attempt Crank pause 2nd attempt

(=Cranking)
Battery A in use Battery B in use

Battery B
16.4.1.3 Binary output: Fuel Solenoid

Related All
applications
Description This output is dedicated to controlling the fuel solenoid (valve). The output is
closed 0.5 before Starter and remains closed all the time the gen-set shall
run.
NOTE:
Learn more about starting procedure in the chapter Engine start.
16.4.1.4 Binary output: Stop Solenoid

Related All
applications
Description This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output is
closed in the moment when the gen-set shall stop and remains active until
the gen-set is stopped, but at least for time period of Stop Time. If the Stop
time has elapsed and the engine is still not stopped, the stop solenoid is de-
energized for 5 and then energized again for max. Stop time and this repeats
until the engine is stopped.
NOTE:
Learn more about evaluation of stopped engine in the chapter Stopped gen-
set evaluation.
16.4.1.5 Binary output: Stop Pulse

Related All
applications
Description This output will give a 1 pulse whenever a stop command is issued to the
gen-set, i.e. when the binary output Stop Solenoid is activated.
NT
16.4.1.6 Binary output: Ignition
Related All
applications
Description This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. The output
is closed together with Fuel Solenoid in the moment the gen-set reaches
30RPM during cranking. The output is opened when the gen-set has
stopped.
16.4.1.7 Binary output: Prestart

Related All
applications
Description This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated
just before start, i.e. glow plugs. The output is closed for time period of
Prestart Time prior to activation of the starter motor and remains closed
during cranking and also during pause between cranking attempts.
16.4.1.8 Binary output: Cooling Pump

Related All
applications
Description This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is closed in the moment
the gen-set is started and remains closed until the gen-set is stopped.
16.4.1.9 Binary output: Idle/Nominal

Related All
applications
Description This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of
the engine during the startup phase, if this feature (input) is available on the
particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the idle/nominal switching
is performed over the communication bus.
16.4.1.10 Binary output: Alarm

Related All
applications
Description The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red
bulb in the control room etc. The output is active when at least one
unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist.
NT
16.4.1.11 Binary output: Horn
Related All
applications
Description The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared
alarm. The output is activated each time a new alarm has appeared and
remains active until one of the following events occurs:
 Fault reset is pressed
 Horn reset is pressed
 Horn Timeout has elapsed
16.4.1.12 Binary output: Fault Reset

Related All
applications
Description The output is a copy of Fault Reset button on controller and binary input
FaultResButton.
16.4.1.13 Binary output: GCB Close/Open

Related All
applications
Description This output is to be used for a contactor control in case a contactor is used in
the GCB position. See the chapter Circuit breakers for details about all
outputs available for generator/mains power switches.
16.4.1.14 Binary output: GCB ON Coil

Related All
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of the ON coil of the generator circuit
breaker. See the chapter Circuit breakers for details about all outputs
available for generator/mains power switches.
16.4.1.15 Binary output: GCB OFF Coil

Related All
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of the OFF coil of the generator circuit
16.4.1.16 Binary output: GCB UV Coil

Related All
applications
Description This output is to be used for opening the generator circuit breaker via the
undervoltage coil. See the chapter Circuit breakers for details about all
NT
16.4.1.17 Binary output: Speed Up
Related All
applications
Description This output together with the complementary output Speed Down is designed
for speed and power control at gen-sets, where the governor does not
support analog control. The outputs are also used for direct control of a gas
throttle at asynchronous gen-sets.
NOTE:
Droop function is required when these outputs are used for power control
through a governor.
16.4.1.18 Binary output: Speed Down

Related All
applications
Description This output together with the complementary output Speed Up is designed for
speed and power control at gen-sets, where the governor does not support
analog control. The outputs are also used for direct control of a gas throttle at
asynchronous gen-sets.
NOTE:
Droop function is required when these outputs are used for power control
through a governor.
16.4.1.19 Binary output: AVR Up

Related All
applications
Description This output together with the complementary output AVR Down is designed
for voltage and power factor control at gen-sets, where the AVR does not
support analog control.
NOTE:
Droop function is required when these outputs are used for power factor
control.
16.4.1.20 Binary output: AVR Down

Related All
applications
Description This output together with the complementary output AVR Up is designed for
voltage and power factor control at gen-sets, where the AVR does not
support analog control.
NOTE:
Droop function is required when these outputs are used for power factor
control.
NT
16.4.1.21 Binary output: Ready To Load
Related All
applications
Description The output is closed whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed. Details
about conditions when the GCB can be closed are available in the chapter
Connecting to the load.
16.4.1.22 Binary output: Synchronizing

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed during forward or reverse synchronizing.
16.4.1.23 Binary output: Running

Related All
applications
Description The output is designed to be used as an indication that the gen-set is
running. It is activated at the moment the gen-set has been started and the
idle period has elapsed. It remains active until stop command is issued.
16.4.1.24 Binary output: Loaded

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed whenever the GCB is closed except the unloading phase
prior to opening the GCB.
16.4.1.25 Binary output: Unloading

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed during the unloading phase (ramping the power down)
prior to opening the GCB. More detailed description is available in the chapter
Parallel to mains operation.
16.4.1.26 Binary output: AnalogSwitch 1

Related All
applications
Description This is an output from the Analog switch 1.

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications
16.4.1.29 Binary output: Ctrl HeartBeat

Related All
applications
Description This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is
switched on and functional.
16.4.1.30 Binary output: Gen Healthy

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the generator voltage and frequency is within
limits. It is deactivated:
 immediately when the voltage/frequency gets out of limits (when

GCB is not closed) or
 with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency has got out of
limits (when GCB is closed)
The limits for under/overvoltage, under/overfrequency and voltage unbalance

as well as appropriate delays can be found in the Gener protect setpoint
group.
16.4.1.31 Binary output: Yellow Alarm

Related All
applications
Description Yellow Alarm is active when AL Common Wrn is active.
16.4.1.32 Binary output: Red Alarm

Related All
applications
Description Red Alarm is active when either AL Common Sd or AL Common Stp or AL
Common BOC is active.
16.4.1.33 Binary output: Mode OFF

Related All
applications
Description This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.
NT
16.4.1.34 Binary output: Mode MAN
Related All
applications
Description This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.
16.4.1.35 Binary output: Mode AUT

Related All
applications
Description This output is active whenever the controller is in AUT mode.
16.4.1.36 Binary output: Exerc Timer 1

Related All
applications
Description This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to
make periodic tests of the gen-set and its activation depends on the setpoints
in the Date/time group.
16.4.1.37 Binary output: Exerc Timer 2

Related All
applications
Description This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. Its behaviour depends on
setpoints in Date/time group.
16.4.1.38 Binary output: Power Switch

Related All
applications
Description This is an output from the Power switch function.
16.4.1.39 Binary output: Neutral CB C/O

Related All
applications
Description Neutral Circuit Breaker Close/Open output controls the generator Neutral
circuit breaker. It is intended for contactors – provides a continual active
signal if Neutral CB should be closed. See also setpoint #Neutral cont.
NT
16.4.1.40 Binary output: Breaker Trip
Related All
applications
Description The output is designed for auxiliary breaker tripping.
The output closes if:
- a fast opening of the GCB occurs due to any error (overcurrent, short
current etc.)
- any BOC or SD alarm appears or Emergency Stop is active
It opens if:
- No BOC and SD alarms are active and
- FAULT RESET is pressed
16.4.1.41 Binary output: kWh pulse

Related All
applications
Description This output generates a 100 ms pulse whenever the internal kWh counter is
incremented.
16.4.2 ECU info
16.4.2.1 Binary output: ECU Comm OK

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the
communication with the ECU is established.
16.4.2.2 Binary output: ECU Comm Error

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with
the ECU is not established or has dropped out.
16.4.2.3 Binary output: ECU YellowLamp

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it
has detected a non-critical malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame
on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own
proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.
NT
16.4.2.4 Binary output: ECU RedLamp
Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has
detected a critical malfunction and the engine should not be operated until a
service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on
standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary
frames and some do not provide the flag at all.
16.4.2.5 Binary output: ECU PowerRelay

Related All
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of “keyswitch” input of an ECU. If the
particular ECU does not have keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for
control of DC power for the ECU.
The output closes together with Prestart and remains closed for the entire
duration that the engine is running. It is opened at the moment that the
engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the Fuel Solenoid).
See the picture below for futher detail on how Wrn Ecu Comm is evaluated.
Binary Outputs
ECU Power Relay

On
ECU Power Relay Wrn ECU Comm

Off Evaluated
Maximum Cranking Time Cranking Fail Pause
Engine RPM
Starter
On
Starter
Off
Prestart
On
Prestart
Off
Prestart Time Cranking Fail Pause Engine is running
Start Starting RPM Time
ECU COMMUNICATION ERROR EVALUATION
NT
16.4.3 Alarm mirrors
16.4.3.1 Binary output: AL Gen Volts

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the generator under- or overvoltage alarm is
present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.2 Binary output: AL Gen Freq

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the generator under- or overfrequency alarm is
16.4.3.3 Binary output: AL Overcurrent

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the generator overcurrent or short current alarm is
16.4.3.4 Binary output: AL Gen V,Freq

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the generator under/overvoltage,
under/overfrequency or voltage unbalance alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.5 Binary output: AL Overspeed

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the overspeed alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.6 Binary output: AL Underspeed

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the underspeed alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.7 Binary output: AL Overload

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the overload alarm is present in the alarmlist.
NT
16.4.3.8 Binary output: AL Reverse Pwr
Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the reverse power alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.9 Binary output: AL Start Fail

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the start fail alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.10 Binary output: AL Stop Fail

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the stop fail alarm is present in the alarmlist.
16.4.3.11 Binary output: AL Sync Fail

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the Sync Timeout or RevSyncTimeout is present in
the alarmlist.
16.4.3.12 Binary output: AL Batt Volt

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when the Battery voltage or Battery flat is present in the
alarmlist.
16.4.3.13 Binary output: AL Earth Fault

Related All
applications
Description This output is active when Earth Fault Current alarm is present in alarm list
(extension module IC-NT CT-BIO7 is needed).
16.4.3.14 Binary output: BI1 Status

Related All
applications
Description This output gives information about the status of binary input 1 of the
controller.
 If the related binary input is configured as an alarm input, the output
is closed when the assigned alarm is present in the alarmlist.
 If the related binary input is configured as functional, the output
copies directly the status of the input.
NT
Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
NT
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.

Related All
applications
controller.
16.4.3.23 Binary output: IOM BI1 Status

Related All
applications
extension IOM/PTM module.
NT
Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
16.4.3.31 Binary output: ExtBI 1 Status

Related All
applications
extension module.
NT
Related All
applications
extension module.

Related All
applications
extension module.

Related All
applications
extension module.

Related All
applications
extension module.
NT
Related All
applications
extension module.

Related All
applications
extension module.

Related All
applications
extension module.
16.4.3.39 Binary output: AL AI1 Yel

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is the yellow alarm from the analog input 1 of
the controller present in the alarmlist.

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications
16.4.3.42 Binary output: AL AI1 Red

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is the red alarm from the analog input 1 of

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
16.4.3.45 Binary output: AL IOM AI1 Yel

Related All
applications
the extension IOM/PTM module present in the alarmlist.

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
NT
Related All
applications
16.4.3.49 Binary output: AL IOM AI1 Red

Related All
applications

Related All
applications

Related All
applications
16.4.3.52 Binary output: AL IOM AI4I Red

Related All
applications
16.4.3.53 Binary output: AL Common Wrn

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is any warning type alarm present in the
alarmlist.
16.4.3.54 Binary output: AL Common Sd

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is any shutdown type alarm present in the
alarmlist.
NT
16.4.3.55 Binary output: AL Common Stp
Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is any slow stop type alarm present in the
alarmlist.
16.4.3.56 Binary output: AL Common BOC

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is any BOC type alarm present in the
alarmlist.
16.4.3.57 Binary output: AL Common Fls

Related All
applications
Description The output is closed when there is any sensor fail alarm present in the
alarmlist.
16.4.3.58 Binary output: AL Exct Loss

Related All
applications
Description This output gives the information about the status of the excitation loss
protection. It is active when the generator Excitation Loss alarm is present in
the alarm list.
16.4.4 MINT specific
16.4.4.1 Binary output: Bus Healthy

Related MINT
applications
Description This output is active when the bus voltage and frequency are within limits. It
is deactivated with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency has got
out of limits. The limits for under/overvoltage and under/overfrequency as well
as appropriate delays are the same as for generator voltage/frequency and
can be found in the Gener protect setpoint group.
16.4.4.2 Binary output: System Ready

Related MINT
applications
Description This output is closed if the gen-set group is able to take the current load and
keep the reserve greater than the currently selected reserve for start. This
output should be normally closed while the group works in automatic power
management mode. If the output is open, it means the whole gen-set group is
overloaded. It will open i.e. if a red alarm occurs on one gen-set and there is
no other gen-set available to start instead of the stopped one.
NT
NOTE:
This output does not provide information that the reserve is already reached.
It only gives information that there is enough capacity within the gen-set
group to reach the reserve.
16.4.4.3 Binary output: SystReserve OK

Related MINT
applications
Description The output is closed while the Actual Reserve is greater than the currently
selected reserve for start.
16.4.4.4 Binary output: EnginesSwapped

Related MINT
applications
Description The output is activated by the master controller for 100 ms pulse when the
priority of two gen-sets was swapped by the Running Hours Equalization
function (setpoint #RunHrsMaxDiff).
16.4.5 SPtM specific
16.4.5.1 Binary output: MCB Close/Open

Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is to be used for a contactor control in case a contactor is used in
the MCB position. See the chapter Circuit breakers for details about all
16.4.5.2 Binary output: MCB ON Coil

Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of the ON coil of the mains circuit
16.4.5.3 Binary output: MCB OFF Coil

Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of the OFF coil of the mains circuit
NT
16.4.5.4 Binary output: MCB UV Coil
Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is to be used for control of the undervoltage coil of the mains
circuit breaker. See the chapter Circuit breakers for details about all outputs
16.4.5.5 Binary output: Ready To AMF

Related SPtM
applications
Description The output is closed if the gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the
load if the mains fails, i.e.:
 the gen-set is not running and
 the controller is in AUT mode and
 no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
16.4.5.6 Binary output: Mains Healthy

Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is active while mains failure is not detected, i.e. the mains are
healthy.
16.4.5.7 Binary output: Mains Fail

Related SPtM
applications
Description This output is active while mains failure is detected.
16.4.5.8 Binary output: Mode TEST

Related All
applications
Description This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.
16.5 Table of internal alarms
16.5.1.1 Alarm: Emergency Stop

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related All
applications
Description Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect it to
a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency Stop
NT
to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.
The gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
NOTE:
The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.
16.5.1.2 Alarm: Engine overspeed

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit
adjusted by the setpoint Overspeed Sd. There is no delay for this alarm. See
chapter Speed sensing to learn more about methods of speed measurement.
16.5.1.3 Alarm: Engine underspeed

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will be issued when the gen-set is running and then stops by itself,
i.e. the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Starting RPM.
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated 5 after successful gen-set start
and is being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.
16.5.1.4 Alarm: Start Fail

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set (setpoint Crank
Attempts) have run out but the gen-set did not start. See also Engine start
chapter.
NOTE:
The gen-set cannot be started again until this alarm is reset.
NT
16.5.1.5 Alarm: Stop fail
Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist Stop fail
message
Alarm While the engine shall be stopped
evaluated
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs if the gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that it is
not stopped. The period when the gen-set shall be stopped begins after the fuel has
been switched off and time delay Stop time has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the
fuel resp. starter motor are off.
ENGINE STOP ENGINE START
STARTER
FUEL SOLENOID
Stop time Stop fail alarm is evaluated here
See the chapter Cool down and stop to learn more about symptoms that are taken into
account for the evaluation of stopped engine.
NOTE:
The gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.
16.5.1.6 Alarm: RPM measurement failure

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Sd RPMMeasFail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related All
applications
Description The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM
within the MaxCrank Time, although some of additional running engine
indication sources indicate that the engine has started.
NT
16.5.1.7 Alarm: GCB Fail
Alarm type BOC
Alarmlist message GCB Fail
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will occur when the GCB feedback input does not match the
expected position given by the GCB Close/Open output. It stays active until
the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
 If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be
issued immediately.
 The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an
open or close command within 2 seconds. If synchronizing is
disabled (binary input ForwSyncDisabl is active) the maximum
allowed reaction time is increased to 5.
16.5.1.8 Alarm: MCB Fail

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message MCB Fail
Related SPtM
applications
Description This alarm will occur when the MCB feedback input does not match the
expected position given by the MCB Close/Open output. It stays active until
the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
 If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be
issued immediately.
 Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains
values are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued
after delay given by the setpoint MainsReturnDel has elapsed.
 The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the
close command within 2 seconds. After this period has elapsed the
output MCB Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to
close the breaker will occur first after the alarm is reset.
 The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the
open command within 2 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will
stay deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes
inactive.
 If reverse synchronizing is disabled (binary input RevSyncDisable is
active) the maximal allowed reaction time is increased to 5.
NT
16.5.1.9 Alarm: Forward synchronization timeout
Alarm type Breaker open & cool down
Alarmlist message Sync Timeout
Alarm evaluated During GCB synchronization only
Related All
applications
Description If the synchronization of GCB (forward synchronization) is not successful
within a time period adjusted by the setpoint Sync Timeout, this alarm will be
issued, the gen-set will be cooled down and stopped.
16.5.1.10 Alarm: Reverse synchronization timeout

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message RevSyncTimeout
Alarm evaluated During MCB synchronization only
Related SPtM
applications
Description If the synchronization of MCB (reverse synchronization) is not successful
within a time period adjusted by the setpoint Sync Timeout, this alarm will be
issued and the gen-set will remain in island operation. A new attempt of
reverse synchronization can be initiated as soon as the alarm is reset.
16.5.1.11 Alarm: Generator overload

Alarmlist message BOC Overload
Related All
applications
Description The behaviour of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
 Overload BOC adjusts the overload limit.
 Overload Del adjusts the delay.
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay.
NT
16.5.1.12 Alarm: Generator reverse power
Alarmlist message BOC ReversePwr
Related All
applications
Description This alarm protects the gen-set running parallel to mains or other gen-sets
against the situation, when the engine loses power and becomes to be driven
by the generator acting as an electric motor supplied from the mains or other
gen-sets.
The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
 ReversePwr BOC adjusts the negative kW limit for this alarm.
 ReversePwr Del adjusts the delay.
16.5.1.13 Alarm: Generator under/overvoltage

Alarmlist message BOC Gen Lx >V, BOC Gen Lx <V
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related All
applications
Description This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in all three phases. The
following setpoints are related to it:
 Gen >V Sd adjusts the overvoltage limit.

 Gen <V BOC adjusts the undervoltage limit.
 Gen V Del adjusts the alarm delay.
NOTE:
The generator voltage must be within limits to enable closing of GCB or
starting of synchronization.
16.5.1.14 Alarm: Generator voltage unbalance

Alarmlist message BOC Volt Unbal
Related All
applications
Description This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
 Volt Unbal BOC adjusts the maximum allowed difference between
the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
 Volt Unbal Del adjusts the alarm delay.
NT
16.5.1.15 Alarm: Generator under/overfrequency
Alarmlist message BOC Gen >Freq, BOC Gen <Freq
Related All
applications
Description This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L3. The following
 Gen >Freq BOC adjusts the overfrequency limit.

 Gen <Freq BOC adjusts the underfrequency limit.
 Gen Freq Del adjusts the alarm delay.
NOTE:
The generator voltage must be within limits to enable closing of GCB or
starting of synchronization.
16.5.1.16 Alarm: Generator IDMT overcurrent

Alarmlist message BOC Overcurrnt
Related All
applications
Description The overcurrent alarm is based on IDMT principle. The reaction time of an
IDMT alarm is not fixed, but depends on how much is the protected value
(generator current in this case) above the limit (nominal current). The higher
is the overcurrent, the shorter the reaction time will be. All generator phases
are evaluated.
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoint:
 Amps IDMT Del which defines the reaction time of the protection
when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
The nominal current level, where the alarm starts to be evaluated, is given by
Nomin Current. The reaction time is infinite at this point.
NT
Multiple of base
Reaction time
level
1,0 ∞ 2NOM_DEL * BASE

REACTION TIME =
1,1 50,0 ACTUAL - BASE
1,2 25,0
1,3 16,7 2Nom delay setpoint: 5 s
1,4 12,5
1,5 10,0 IDMT reaction time
1,6 8,3
1,7 7,1 60,0
1,8 6,3
50,0
1,9 5,6
Reaction time [s]

2,0 5,0 40,0
2,1 4,5
30,0
2,2 4,2
2,3 3,8 20,0
2,4 3,6 10,0
2,5 3,3
0,0
2,6 3,1
1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0
2,7 2,9
2,8 2,8 Multiple of base level
2,9 2,6
3,0 2,5
IDMT reaction time example (2Nom delay adjusted to 5 )
16.5.1.17 Alarm: Generator short current

Alarmlist message BOC ShortCrct
Related All
applications
Description This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
 Short Crct BOC adjusts the short current limit.
 Short Crct Del adjusts the delay in fine steps.
16.5.1.18 Alarm: Generator current unbalance

Alarmlist message BOC Amps Unbal
Related All
applications
Description This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
 Amps Unbal BOC adjusts the maximum allowed difference between

the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
 Amps Unbal Del adjusts the alarm delay.
NT
16.5.1.19 Alarm: Phase sequence
Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Gen CCW Rot, Mains CCW Rot
Related All
applications
Description The controller detects phase sequence on both generator and mains/bus
voltage terminals. These protections are important after controller installation
to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. There is a fixed defined phase
NT
sequence in InteliCompact controller: L1, L2 and L3. When the phases are
connected in a different order (e.g. L1, L3, L2 or L2, L1, L3) alarms are
detected. These alarms prevent circuit breaker closing.
16.5.1.20 Alarm: Maintenance timer

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message WrnMaintenance
Related All
applications
Description Adjust the setpoint WrnMaintenance to the interval of the next maintenance
check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is running
and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. It will continue to count down to
negative values and the alarm message will remain in the alarm list (even if
the controller is switched off and on again) until the setpoint is re-adjusted to
a positive value.
16.5.1.21 Alarm: Charging alternator fail

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ChrgAltFail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related All
applications
Description This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+
terminal is lower than 80% of the controller supply voltage. This alarm works
similar to the red “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint D+ Function has to be in CHRGFAIL or ENABLED position to
enable this alarm.
NT
16.5.1.22 Alarm: Battery voltage
Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Batt Volt
Related All
applications
Description This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low or
too high. The following setpoints are related to it:
 Batt Undervolt adjusts the low voltage limit.

 Batt Overvolt adjusts the high voltage limit.
 Batt Volt Del adjusts the alarm delay.
16.5.1.23 Alarm: Governor output at limit

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn SpdRegLim
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will be issued if the governor output has 0V or 10V for more than
2. This situation can occur, for example, if the Speed Gov Char setpoint is in
the wrong position or if the connection of the governor output to the governor
is not correct.
16.5.1.24 Alarm: AVR output at limit

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn AVRregLim
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will be issued if the governor output has 0% or 100% for more
than 2 . This situation can occur, for example, if the connection of the AVRi
output to the AVR is not correct.
16.5.1.25 Alarm: Battery flat

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd BatteryFlat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related All
applications
Description This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the
gen-set. If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is
so exhausted that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized
that it causes controller reset.
NT
16.5.1.26 Alarm: Low BackupBatt
Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message LowBackupBatt
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the internal backup battery needs to be replaced.
16.5.1.27 Alarm: Low Fuel Level 1

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Level
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the set yellow alarm of
relevant AI (Fuel Level).
16.5.1.28 Alarm: Low Fuel Level 2

Alarmlist message Stp Fuel Level
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the set red alarm of
relevant AI (Fuel Level).
16.5.1.29 Alarm: High Water Temperature 1

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Water Temp
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the water temperature is higher than the set yellow
alarm of relevant AI (Water Temp).
NT
16.5.1.30 Alarm: High Water Temperature 2
Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Water Temp
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the water temperature is higher than the set red
alarm of relevant AI (Water Temp).
16.5.1.31 Alarm: Low Oil Pressure 1

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Press
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the set yellow alarm of
relevant AI (Oil Press).
16.5.1.32 Alarm: Low Oil Pressure 2

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Press
Related All
applications
Description This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the set red alarm of
relevant AI (Oil Press).
16.5.1.33 Alarm: Engine Stop Fail

Alarm type Warning/Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Stop Fail
Related All
applications
Description Engine stop fail indication. Stop fail means that the engine does not reach
“still engine” state within Engine params: Stop time.
NOTE:
“Still engine” conditions:
– Engine speed (RPM) = 0 and
– AI: Oil press < Starting POil and
– D+ terminal is not active and
– BI: RunIndication 1 and 2 and 3 are not active and
– Generator voltage < 15 V (in all phases) and
– Generator frequency = 0 Hz
NT
If all these conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 delays are used to confirm “still
engine” state.
16.5.1.34 Alarm: Bus power loss sensing

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Bus Measure Error
Related MINT
applications
Description The “Bus Measure Error” is detected in MINT application when the voltage on
the controller’s bus terminals is out of limits 20 after:
a) GCB (own) was closed in MAN or AUT mode
b) MCB (feedback) was closed in AUT mode
c) Any other GCB in power management group (on CAN bus)
was closed.
The alarm is activated after 20 s. However, the GCB (own) closing is blocked
immediately for safety reasons.
This protection can avoid e.g. potential direct closing of GCB while the
controller’s bus conductors are unintentionally unplugged from the terminals.
16.5.1.35 Alarm: NCB fail

Alarmlist message BOC NCB fail
Related All
applications
Description Neutral Circuit Breaker (NCB) Failure was detected.
a) Wrong connection between breaker feedback signals and controller binary
input.
b) Wrong breaker signal logic or breaker signal feedback signal logic.
16.5.1.36 Alarm: Fuel Theft

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn FuelTheft
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel
Level) drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint MaxFuelDrop.
16.5.1.37 Alarm: Earth Fault Current

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message SdEarthFltCurr
Related All
applications
NT
Description This alarm indicates that the value of earth current EarthFaultCurr is higher
than the setpoint EarthFault Sd and EarthFaulth Del delay has elapsed. The
alarm activates binary output AL Earth Fault.
16.5.1.38 Alarm: Excitation Lost

Alarmlist message BOC ExctLoss
Related All
applications
Description Loss of excitation is based on measurement of negative kVAr. This alarm
indicates that the value of negative kVAr is higher than the setpoint
ExcitationLoss and ExctLoss Del delay has elapsed. This alarm activates AL
Exct Loss binary output.
16.5.1.39 Alarm: Override

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Override
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs when binary input Sd Override is activated.
16.5.1.40 Alarm: IOM Fail

Alarm type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd IOM Fail
Related All
applications
Description Communication error between the controller and extension module IG-IOM or
IGS-PTM.
16.5.1.41 Alarm: RA Fail

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn RA Fail
Related All
applications
Description Communication error between the controller and extension module IGL-
RA15.
16.5.1.42 Alarm: Bad Power Configuration

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn BadPwrCfg
NT
Related MINT
applications
Description This alarm occurs when at least two or more controllers in MINT have a
different power decimals setting.
16.5.1.43 Alarm: ECU Alarm

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Alarm
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs when an error is logged in ECU Alarm List.
16.5.1.44 Alarm: ECU Communication

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Comm
Related All
applications
Description This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with
the ECU is not established or has dropped out.
16.5.1.45 Alarm: Active Call Fail

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message ActiveCallCH1Fail, CH2Fail, CH3Fail
Related All
applications
Description Indication of unsuccessful active call 1-3. See Inteli Communication Guide for
information about active calls and SMS/E-mail group of setpoints for setting.
16.5.1.46 Alarm: WrnTstOnLdFail

Alarm type Warning
Alarmlist message WrnTstOnLdFail
Related SPtM
applications
Description The alarm occurs if there is a non-zero mains current if the Load Ramp time
elapsed during unloading.
NT

InteliCompact NT 2.1 Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliCompact NT 2.1 Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats



Paralleling gen-set controller

SW version 2.1, July 2015

Copyright ©2015 ComAp a.s.

REVISION NUMBER RELATED SW. VERSION DATE

This documentation is also available in electronic form as a Windows help file

1.2 Conformity Declaration

2.1 General description

2.2 Configurability and monitoring

“Logical” inputs Alarm

“Logical” outputs FIRMWARE

2.3.1 Single applications

SINGLE PARALLEL TO MAINS APPLICATION

2.3.2 Multiple applications

ISLAND-PARALLEL OPERATION WITHOUT MAINS

ISLAND-PARALLEL OPERATION WITH AMF AND WITHOUT PARALLELING

2.4 True RMS measurement

3.2 Package contents

Mounting cutout size: 175 x 115 mm

SPECIFIED TIGHTENING TORQUE 0.5 NM (4.4 IN-LB)

SPECIFIED TIGHTENING TORQUE 0.4 NM (3.5 IN-LB)

3.8 Power supply

Or by connecting a special I-LBA Low Battery Adaptor module:

3.9 Voltage and current inputs

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT WIRING

CURRENT MEASUREMENT WIRING

3.10 Speed measurement

RPM measurement from the pickup.

RPM is measured from generator frequency.

3.10.3 Additional running engine indication

3.11 Binary inputs

W IRING OF BINARY INPUTS

3.12 Binary outputs

W IRING OF BINARY OUTPUTS

3.13 Analog inputs

W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – GROUNDED SENSORS

W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – ISOLATED SENSORS

3.13.1 Tristate inputs

W IRING OF ANALOG INPUTS – USED AS BINARY OR TRI-STATE

 The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB

3.14.1 Breaker control outputs

3.15 AVR interface

AVRi output can be connected as symmetrical: OUT1-OUT2 or unsymmetrical OUT1-GND or OUT2-

IG-AVRI MODULE WIRING

AVRi trim turned in min.

SYMMETRIC AVRI OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC

AVRi trim turned in min.

AVRi trim turned in min.

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

3 AVR Bias = 50%

Module R726 is not required.

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

AVR Bias = 50%

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

J2 AVR Bias = 50%

AVRi output is connected instead of Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter

AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to

LeRoy-Somer: R 221, R 222

18 VAC 230/ 400VAC from generator

Module R726 is not required.

IG- 230/400VAC From AVRi trim to minimum counter